JP2019072045A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of appropriately displaying first identification information and second identification information and improving the performance effect.SOLUTION: The game machine executes a variable display by a number and stops the variable display by a number and characters. A number by which the variable display is executed is displayed larger than a number and characters by which the variable display is stopped. In addition, specific display execution means changes a first specific display, after it is displayed in a period in which detection means is disabled for detection, to a second specific display more advantageous to the user than the first specific display as a specific display corresponding to the detection means detectable of the operation of the user. The specific display execution means then executes an operation performance using the changed second specific display in a period in which the detection means is enabled for detection.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 13

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more particularly to a gaming machine capable of performing variable display of identification information and controlling it to an advantageous state for the player.

  As such a gaming machine, when executing variable display of identification information, it consists of numerical information for the first identification information and decoration information as the second identification information, and during the variable display, the numerical information only changes. However, there has been a mode in which the decoration information is attached to the numerical information at the time of the change stop (Patent Document 1). In addition, there has been a case where the variable display by the numerical information is started, and the decoration information is attached to the numerical information in the middle of the fluctuation (Patent Document 2).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2007-135800 (FIG. 31) JP, 2004-173716, A (Drawing 8 and Drawing 9)

  However, in the gaming machines of Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2 described above, since the size of the numerical information as the first identification information at the time of the change stop is uniform, the display mode of the decoration information as the second identification information There was a possibility that it might not be possible to make a suitable display depending on

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying first identification information and second identification information.

(1) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing variable display (variable display or the like) of identification information (symbol information, symbol etc.) and controlling the advantageous state (big hit gaming state etc.) advantageous to the player. There,
It is provided with fluctuation display means (effect display device 9, microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) capable of executing fluctuation display of identification information,
Identification information (symbol information etc.) includes first information (numeric information, numbers etc.) and second information (decoration information, characters etc.),
In the display pattern of the identification information, a first display pattern (a pattern displayed with numerals, etc.) for displaying the first information without displaying the second information, and a first for displaying the first information and the second information 2 Display patterns (patterns displayed with numbers and characters, etc.) are provided,
The variable display means executes the variable display by the first display pattern after the identification information starts to change in a predetermined direction (e.g., downward direction) (performs the variable display by numerals, etc.), and the second display Stop the fluctuation display by the pattern (stop the fluctuation display with numbers and characters, etc.),
The display mode is different between the first information when displayed in the first display pattern and the first information when displayed in the second display pattern (as shown in FIG. 13, numbers When displaying by only the numbers are displayed larger than the numbers when displaying with numbers and characters, etc.),
further,
Detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A, touch sensor, infrared sensor, camera, etc.);
Specific display corresponding to the detection means (for example, small button (white) D 901, large button (white) D 902, large button (red) D 903, stick D 904, small button (white shown in FIG. 47, FIG. 54 to FIG. ) Specific display execution means (for example, button development effect processing (S90529), variable display effect processing (S90172), etc.) for performing D901U, large button (white) D902U, large button (red) D903U, etc.
Equipped with
The specific display execution means is
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, small button (white) D 901 etc.) and an advantage for the player over the first specific display (for example, big hit expectation, 16R probability variation big hit (see FIG. 29) The second specific display (for example, when the first specific display is the small button (white) D901), the second specific display is high when the expected level of expectation is high, usually when there is a big hit and a definite change big hit Large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, etc. When the first specific display is large button (white) D902, the second specific display is large button (red) D903, stick D904, etc. When the first specific display is the large button (red) D 903, the second specific display can display the stick D 904 or the like),
After the first specific display is displayed in the ineffective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 51 to 60), the first specific display is changed to the second specific display. (For example, after the small button (white) D901 is displayed as shown in FIG. 54C, the small button (white) D901 is changed to a large button (white) D902 as shown in FIG. , Change the large button (white) D 902 to the large button (red) D 903 as shown in FIG.
In the effective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T11 to T13 shown in FIGS. 51 to 60), the second specific display after change (for example, shown in FIG. 55 (J) or 55 (K) As shown in FIG. 55 (L), the operation presentation (for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (K)) is performed to prompt the operation using the large button (red) D 903 or the large button (red) D 903 U etc. It is characterized in that an effect to be notified etc. is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the first identification information and the second identification information can be suitably displayed. Also, the rendering effect is improved.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above,
The variation display means displays the second information (character A to character I or the like shown in FIG. 12) according to the type of the first information (numbers 1 to 9 shown in FIG. 12 or the like) provided in plural types. The variable display is stopped in accordance with the second display pattern to be displayed (as shown in FIG. 13, the variable display is stopped in a pattern for displaying a character corresponding to a number).

  According to such a configuration, the first identification information and the second identification information can be suitably displayed.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above,
When the variable display means is in the reach state, the display mode of the first information and the second information is displayed differently from the display mode before the reach state (as shown in FIG. 15, reach) During the formation action, a large movement of the character is displayed, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the first identification information and the second identification information can be suitably displayed.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The change display means executes a first change effect when changing from the first display pattern to the second display pattern (executes an effect of changing from only numbers to numbers and characters as a change stop action) When changing from the second display pattern to the first display pattern, a second change effect is executed (an action of changing from a number and a character to only a number is executed as an action at the start of variation),
The first change effect and the second change effect have different execution modes (as shown in FIG. 14, in the variation stop symbol action executed as the first change effect, the character is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 Jumping forward from the depth direction when viewed from the front, the numbers move downward, the character is displayed larger than the numbers, and in the variation start symbol action executed as the second change effect, the numbers and characters from the character Is erased, and only the number displayed larger than before the change changes downward etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the first identification information and the second identification information can be suitably displayed.

(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The variation display means displays, by the first display pattern, identification information indicating that the advantageous state is to be controlled at the end of the reach effect, and the second display of the confirmation display of the identification information after the end of the reach effect The pattern is displayed (as shown in FIG. 15, the symbols are aligned with only numbers at the end of the SP reach, and a decision operation is performed with numbers and characters at the time of finalized display after returning to the normal background).

  According to such a configuration, the first identification information and the second identification information can be suitably displayed.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
When the fluctuation display means stops the fluctuation display of the identification information, it displays the second information so that the display range is wider than the first information before the stop (as shown in FIG. 13). When the variable display is stopped, the character is displayed wider than the display range of the number before the stop, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the first identification information and the second identification information can be suitably displayed.

(7) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The variation display means displays the second information so as to fly forward from the rear of the gaming machine when the variation display of identification information is stopped (when variation is stopped as shown in FIGS. 13 and 14) The character is displayed as a design action so as to fly forward from the depth direction when the screen of the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a powerful display using the second identification information.

(8) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7),
The advantageous state is provided with a highly advantageous first advantageous state (such as a probability variation big hit state) and a second advantageous state (usually a big hit state etc.) that is less advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The first information corresponding to the first advantageous state (such as a numeral corresponding to a probability variation big hit) and the first information corresponding to the second advantageous state (such as a numeral corresponding to a big hit) are provided.
The variation display means executes the second display pattern only in the first information corresponding to the first advantageous state (as shown in the modification, only in a number corresponding to a probability variation big hit, a number and a character Etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a special impression to the highly advantageous first information.

(9) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8),
The variable display is started based on the fact that the game medium (game ball or the like) has entered the start area (the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 or the like),
A high-frequency state control that can control the start area to a high-frequency state (such as a short-time state) in which game media can easily enter than in the normal state until a predetermined condition (fluctuating 100 rotations, etc.) is satisfied after the advantageous state ends. Further comprising means (microcomputer 560 etc for game control),
The fluctuation display means starts fluctuation display with the first display pattern in the high frequency state and stops fluctuation display with the first display pattern (in the time saving state, it starts fluctuation with only the number) Stop the change with numbers only, etc.)

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the first information in the high frequency state.

(10) The gaming machine according to any one of (3) to (9),
The system further comprises presentation sound output means (microcomputer 100 for presentation control, sound output board 70, speaker 27 etc.) for outputting presentation sound according to presentation,
It may develop into a special reach (SP reach etc.) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the reach state.
The variable display means reduces and displays (displays with a small symbol, etc.) the first information in the special reach, and reduces and displays the first information according to the effect sound during the special reach. The information is subjected to a predetermined operation and displayed (as shown in FIG. 15, the small symbol is vigorously moved according to the effect sound during the SP reach as the small symbol action pattern B, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the first information reduced and displayed can be suitably displayed.

(11) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10),
The system further comprises a notice effect executing means (microcomputer 100 for effect control etc.) capable of executing a predetermined notice effect (full screen notice effect etc.),
The predetermined advance presentation effect is executed to make the display mode of the identification information invisible or hard to recognize at the start of the variable display (as shown in FIG. 18 (B2), FIG. 20 (B2) or FIG. 22 (B2) Such as black out effect that a certain decorative pattern becomes invisible),
In the identification information, when the predetermined advance effect is executed, it is possible to start variable display in a predetermined direction after the execution period of the predetermined advance effect (FIG. 18 (B2), FIG. 20 (B2) (D2), (E2), (D), (E) or (D) of FIG. 22 after the execution period of the blackout effect shown in (B2) or (B2) of FIG. Forward movement starts, etc.)

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the movement of the identification information from being obscured, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Moreover, the invention which concerns on the following (12)-(20) is included in the form for implementing invention mentioned later. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, there has been known a gaming machine which displays an operation promoting image corresponding to the operation means during the effective period of the operation means (button or the like) as disclosed in JP-A-2016-83473. There is. In this gaming machine, when the user does not perform the operation, the operation promoting image may be gradually enlarged, or may be changed from the button-shaped operation promoting image to the patram-shaped operation promoting image. However, since the operation promotion image corresponding to the operation means changes with time and the operation promotion image does not change when it is operated earlier, there is a problem that the rendering effect is poor. In view of this point, provision of a gaming machine with improved rendering effects is desired.

(12) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.), and detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (For example, a push button 9031 B, a stick controller 9031 A, a touch sensor, an infrared sensor, a camera, etc.), and a specific display corresponding to the detection means (for example, small buttons (white) D901 shown in FIGS. Specific display execution means (such as large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, small button (white) D901U, large button (white) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc. For example, a button development effect process (S90529), a variable display effect process (S90172), etc. The execution means includes, as the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button (white) D901 etc.) and an advantage for the player over the first specific display (for example, big hit expectation, 16R probability variation big hit (see FIG. 29. The second specific display (for example, the first specific display is a small button (white) D 901) with a high degree of expectation, an expectation with which a normal big hit and a probability change big hit normally occur. 2 If the first specific display is the large button (white) D902, the second specific display is the large button (red) D903, and the second specific display is a large button (white) D902, a large button (red) D903, a stick D904, etc. When the first specific display is the large button (red) D 903 such as the stick D 904, the second specific display can display the stick D 904 etc.), and the detection by the detection means is not effective. In the interval (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIG. 51 to FIG. 60), after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 54C) After the small button (white) D901 is displayed as shown in FIG. 55, the small button (white) D901 is changed to a large button (white) D902 as shown in FIG. 55 (G), and further, the large button (white) D902 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 55 (I), the large button (red) D 903 is changed to the above-mentioned detection means after the change in the effective period of detection (for example, T11 to T13 shown in FIGS. 51 to 60). Operation presentation (for example, FIG. 55 (K) using the second specific display (for example, large button (red) D 903 or large button (red) D 903 U, etc. as shown in FIG. 55 (J) or FIG. 55 (K)) The operation is prompted as shown in FIG. 55 ( As shown in L), it is characterized in that an effect of notifying the result is performed.

  According to the above configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

(13) In the gaming machine according to (12), the first specific display is an effect that acts on the specific display (for example, the weak effect, the intermediate effect, the strong effect shown in FIG. 49C) Is changed to the second specific display (for example, the small button (white) D 901 shown in FIG. 56C is a small button (as shown in FIG. 56D or 56E). White) The weak action effect of displaying the image JS901 and the image JS902 acting on the D901 is executed to change the large button (white) D902 as shown in FIG. 56 (E), the large shown in FIG. 57 (G) In the button (white) D 902, as shown in FIG. 57H and FIG. 57 (I), a middle action effect of displaying the image TS 901, the image TS 902 and the image TS 903 acting on the large button (white) D 902 is executed. According to FIG. The small button (white) D901 shown in FIG. 60 (A) changes to the stick D904 as shown, and the image KS901 acting on the small button (white) D901 as shown in FIG. 60 (B) and FIG. 60 (C). The image KS 902 or the image KS 903 may be displayed to be changed to the stick D 904 as shown in FIG.

  According to the above configuration, the effect is improved by the action effect.

(14) In the gaming machine of the above (12) or (13), the action effect acting on the specific display is a plurality of types (for example, weak action effect, middle action effect, strong action shown in FIG. 49 (C) etc.) And the like, and the rate at which the second specific display changes is different depending on which of the action effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 49C, there is a change from the case without change) In the case of (weak change, medium change or strong change), since the determination ratio of the weak action production, the medium action production, and the strong action production is different, depending on which button etc. the action production is executed, the second The rate of change to the specific display may be different).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the operation effect.

(15) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (12) to (14), a plurality of types of action effects (for example, weak action effects, medium action effects shown in FIG. 49C) are applied to the specific display. The display mode of the specific display after the change is, for example, a large button (white) D 902, a large button (red) D 903, and a stick D 904 shown in FIG. 47 and FIG. There is a large button (white) D 902 U, a large button (red) D 903 U, a stick D 904 U, etc., and the ratio of changing to the specific display varies depending on which of the effects is performed (for example, As shown in FIG. 49C, in the case of weak change (one-step change), medium change (two-step change), and strong change (three-step change), weak-action effects, medium-action Each decision of production, strong action production Because the ratio is different, the ratio of weak change, medium change, strong change is different depending on which button etc. effect presentation is executed.For example, when the small button (white) D901 before change is When the weak change is executed, the small button (white) D901 changes to the large button (white) D902, and when the middle change is performed, the small button (white) D901 changes to the large button (red) D903, which is strong When the change is performed, the small button (white) D 901 changes to the stick D 904. Therefore, the ratio of changing to any specific display varies depending on which button etc. the effect presentation is performed. You may

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the operation effect.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (12) to (15), the detection means includes a plurality of types (for example, push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A, etc.), and the detection means corresponds to the specific display after change. The operation effect detected by the detection means is executed (for example, the operation effect detected by the push button 9031 B corresponding to the large button (white) D 902 after change as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 57 and FIG. 60, the motion controller detects the operation effect detected by the push button 9031 B corresponding to the large button (red) D 903 after the change, and the stick controller 9031 A corresponding to the stick D 904 after the change. The operation effect to be detected may be executed).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to focus attention on which specific display means corresponds to which operation means.

(17) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (12) to (16), the specific display execution means is an ineffective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 to T11 or the like shown in FIGS. When the specific display is displayed, the specific display is displayed according to an aspect indicating that it is the ineffective period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 60, a small button (superimposed on the control line K90) White) D901, large button (white) D902 on which restriction line K90 is superimposed, large button (red) D903 on which restriction line K90 is superimposed, and stick D904 on which restriction line K90 is superimposed may be displayed. .

  According to the above configuration, it is easy to understand that it is the ineffective period.

(18) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (12) to (17), the specific display execution means displays the specific display over a plurality of variable displays (for example, a plurality of (re) variable displays as pseudo continuous change) The specific display may be displayed over the display, the specific display may be displayed over a plurality of variable displays by prefetching, etc., and may be changeable.

  According to the above configuration, expectation can be enhanced over a plurality of variable displays.

(19) A notice effect (for example, a cut-in effect) for giving a notice that the gaming machine according to any one of (12) to (18) is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state etc.) , The countdown effect, the feature fall effect, etc.), and the effect presentation acting on the specific display is performed by the execution of the advance presentation effect, and the second specification is performed by the action presentation being performed. It may be changed to display.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for a specific advance notice effect.

(20) The gaming machine according to any one of the above (12) to (19) is in the first state (for example, the state in which the auto button function is set to be invalid) or the second state (for example, Setting means (eg, auto button setting processing shown in FIG. 61) which can be set to a state in which the auto button function is effectively set, etc., and a specific effect (for example, a button advance notice when the effect execution condition is satisfied) In the effects A to C and the decision button effect, it is possible to execute the display to decrease the scale of the gauge display, the display of the advance notice and the display of the yes / no, etc. based on the operation of the push button 9031B being detected. Specific effect executing means (for example, variable display effect process shown in FIG. 44, etc.), the specific effect executing means, in the first state, the detection result of the detecting means It is possible to execute a specific effect based on the fact that the effect execution condition is satisfied, but in the second state, it is possible to execute a specific effect that the effect execution condition is satisfied regardless of the detection result of the detection means ( For example, when the auto button function is set to be effective, even if the push button 9031 B is not operated, display of the advance notice display, display of the pass / fail display, display to decrease the scale of the gauge display, etc.) are performed. The setting means can change the setting from the first state to the second state based on the detection result of the detection means while the variable display is being performed (for example, a part that executes the processing of steps S907103 to S907104 of FIG. 61). Etc.).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the interest from being reduced.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a figure showing a hit classification table. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of a main board (game control board). It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table and a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the change pattern table used in order to determine a change pattern in a tabular form. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a figure which shows the relationship between 1st information and 2nd information. It is a figure which shows the aspect of a fluctuation display. It is a timing chart of non-reach when symbol display pattern. It is a timing chart of SP reach big hit time symbol display pattern. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is a timing chart which shows the relation of the change of a decoration pattern, and each notice production etc. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation execution. It is a timing chart which shows the relation of the change of a decoration pattern, and each notice production etc. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation execution. It is a timing chart which shows the relation of the change of a decoration pattern, and each notice production etc. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation execution. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine by another mode. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the effect control command. FIG. 8 is an explanatory view exemplifying a game random number counted on the main substrate side. It is an explanatory view explaining an example of a change category and a change pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a data control area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a production control pattern, etc. It is a block diagram etc. which show the structural example of the data holding area for presentation control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the starting winning a prize judgment processing in special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of starting winning a prize. It is a flow chart etc. which show an example of random number value judging processing at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of a change category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a change category determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the effect determination processing at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is an explanatory view explaining an example of a button development production category and a button development production pattern. It is a flow chart which shows an example of button development production determination processing. It is an explanatory view explaining a determination rate etc. of button development production. It is an explanatory view explaining a decision rate of a button development production pattern. It is explanatory drawing explaining the flow of the specific button development production in various periods in a button development production. It is an explanatory view explaining a flow of concrete button development presentation. It is an explanatory view explaining a flow of concrete button development presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an auto button setting process. FIG. 14 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a display mode in the case of setting the function of the auto button to valid or invalid. It is explanatory drawing which shows the comparative example of the automatic continuous hit by long press operation, and the automatic continuous hit by an automatic button function.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Although a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be other gaming machines such as a coin gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. As long as it is a machine, it may be any game machine.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a hit classification table.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine in which a game is performed by striking a gaming ball as a gaming medium into the gaming area 7. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided so as to be openable and closable in the game frame. The play space is a front frame (not shown) installed openably and closably with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism board (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (games described later And the board 6). In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game is performed by driving a game ball as a game medium into the game area.

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the bat supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball tray 4 for storing gaming balls which can not be accommodated in the bat supply tray 3, a bat operating handle (operation knob) 5 for emitting a bat, and the like. In addition, the game board 6 is detachably attached to the back of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body that constitutes it and various components attached to the plate-like body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, there is formed a game area 7 where the driven game balls can flow down.

  The member forming the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 4 is formed in a stick shape (rod shape) at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is attached a stick controller 122 which can be gripped and tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). In the stick controller 122, a predetermined operation finger (for example, a forefinger or the like) is pressed and pulled in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 122 with the operation hand (for example, left hand or the like). A trigger button 125 (see FIG. 3) that can perform an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 121 (FIG. 3) that detects a predetermined instruction operation by pushing or pulling the trigger button 125 See) is built-in. In addition, a tilting direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a tilting operation on the operating rod is provided in the inside of the main body of the lower tray at the lower part of the stick controller 122 or the like. In addition, the stick controller 122 incorporates a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for vibrating the stick controller 122.

  On the member forming the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3, the player performs a predetermined instruction operation, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation by the player or the like. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the operation performed by the player on the push button 120 may be provided inside the body of the upper tray at the installation position of the push button 120 or the like. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in the upper and lower positional relationship in the central portion of the upper and lower dishes. On the other hand, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may be shifted to either the left or the right in the upper and lower plates while maintaining the upper and lower positional relationship. Alternatively, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may not be in the vertical positional relationship, but may be in the horizontal positional relationship, for example. As the operation means, a lever switch and other operation means such as a jog dial may be provided.

  Near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 is provided as display means capable of variably displaying (also referred to as variable display) effect symbols as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each of them. The effect design as identification information is composed of numeric information (for example, a number) as first information and decoration information (for example, a character) as second information. The display mode of the first identification information and the second identification information changes in response to the variable display. On the right side of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, a first special symbol indicator (first variation display unit) 8a that variably displays first special symbols as plural types of identification information that can identify each of the first special symbols, A second special symbol display (second variation display unit) 8b is provided which variably displays a second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each.

  Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is configured by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers and characters. The effect display device 9 is configured of a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and provided on the display screen is a effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Be In the effect symbol display area, symbol display areas are formed in which, for example, three effect symbols for decoration (for effect) on the left, middle and right are variably displayed.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are generically referred to as a special symbol indicator (variation indicator) There is something to do.

  Although this embodiment shows the case where the two special symbol displays 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may have only one special symbol display.

  Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is controlled by the game control microcomputer mounted on the main board (game control board). The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed by the first special symbol display 8a, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the fluctuation display, and the second special symbol display 8b is performed by the first special symbol display 8a. (2) When the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  More specifically, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied with the first start condition or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening 13 Alternatively, after passing through (including winning) the second start winning opening 14, the change display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, the change of the first special symbol and the second special symbol It is started based on the fact that the display is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed), and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed when the fluctuation display time (variation time) has elapsed. Do. The game ball passing means that the game ball has passed through an area defined as a winning area such as a winning opening or a gate in advance, and includes the concept that the gaming ball has entered the winning opening (winning). It is. Furthermore, deriving and displaying a display result means to stop and display a symbol (example of identification information).

  When the big hit display result (big hit symbol) as the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, or the big hit display result (big hit symbol) as the specific display result on the second special symbol display 8b When it is derived and displayed, the jackpot display result (combination of big hit symbols) as the specific display result is also derived and displayed on the effect display device 9. As described above, when the specific display result is displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is controlled to the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) as the advantageous state in which the player is given an advantageous value (favorable value).

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol to be the final stop symbol (for example, middle symbol among left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbol (for example, left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stop, swing, zoom in / out or deform in the state that matches the combination of symbols, or display multiple symbols in synchronization with the same symbol, or change the position of the display symbol Then, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called reach effect.

  Here, in the reach state, when the effect design stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 constitutes a part of the big hit combination, the fluctuation display of the effect design which is not yet stopped is continued. The display state or the display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are variably displayed synchronously while constituting all or part of the big hit combination. In other words, reach refers to a state in which identification information constitutes a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least a part of the variable display areas is in a variable display mode. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state in which the same symbol stops in the left and right symbol display areas, and the symbol does not stop in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

  And the display production in the reach state is reach production display (reach production). In addition, at the time of reach, there are times when the effect which is different from usual is done with the lamp and the sound. This effect is called reach effect. In addition, when reaching, a character (effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a symbol (effect symbol etc)) is displayed, or a display mode (for example, color etc.) of a background image of the effect display device 9 ) May be changed. This change in the display of the character and the display mode of the background is called reach effect display. In addition, some reach are set so that a big hit is more likely to occur when they appear, as compared to the normal reach. Such special reach is called super reach.

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first start winning hole 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  Further, below the winning device having the first start winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second starting winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball can be won in the second start winning hole 14 (it becomes easy to get a start prize), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the second starting winning hole 14 than the first starting winning hole 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball does not win the second start winning hole 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the first starting winning hole 13 than the second starting winning hole 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win, it may be configured to be able to win (that is, the gaming ball is hard to win). Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b consisting of four indicators for displaying the number of activated winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, ie, the second reserve memory number. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol suspension storage indicator 18b, the number of activated winning balls entering the first start winning opening 13, ie, the first suspension storage number (pending storage is also referred to as start storage or start prize storage). A first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a consisting of four indicators for displaying) is provided. The first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  In the game machine, a hit ball firing device (not shown) which drives the drive motor in response to the player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch the game ball into the game area 7 ) Is provided. The game balls fired from the hit ball launcher enter the game area 7 through the ball hitting rails formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descend the game area 7. If the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 13 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a, it is possible to start the variable display of the first special symbol (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is ended, the first The start condition of 1 is satisfied), the fluctuation display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 8a, and the fluctuation display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first start winning opening 13. If it is not in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first number of pending storages is increased by 1 on the condition that the number of first pending storages has not reached the upper limit value.

  If the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, it is possible to start the variable display of the second special symbol (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the second The start condition of 2) is satisfied, and the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol display 8 b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variation display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second start winning opening 14. If it is not in a state where variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second pending storage number is increased by one on the condition that the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Perform variable display of the effect pattern as the symbol of. The variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variation display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. In addition, the variation display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8 b and the variation display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 8b, a rendering symbol that evokes a big hit in the effect display device 9 The combination of is displayed stopped.

  In addition, a hold storage display unit (total hold storage display unit) displaying the total number of the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number (total hold memory number) at the lower position on the display screen of the effect display device 9 , Reserve display area, not shown). In the total holding storage display unit, the holding storage number can be specified as the holding storage display, for example, by the display number of the predetermined image (by displaying one holding storage image corresponding to each of the holding storage information, Specify the number of pending storages) is displayed. As described above, by providing the combined hold storage display unit for displaying the total number, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of formation of execution conditions for which the variable display start condition is not satisfied. In each of the first special symbol holding storage indicator 18a, the second special symbol holding storage indicator 18b, and the effect display 9, the light emission display and the image display for indicating the number of holding storages is a hold display or a hold It is called memory display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 has an opening and closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when the display is derived, the opening / closing plate is controlled by the solenoid 21 to be in the open state, whereby the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  In the jackpot gaming state, the special variable winning ball device 20 is repeatedly and continuously controlled to repeat the open state and the closed state. In the repeated continuation control, a state in which the special variable winning prize ball device 20 is opened is called a round. Thus, the repeat continuation control is also referred to as round control. In the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot types are provided, and when it is determined to be a jackpot, any jackpot type is selected.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, an ordinary symbol display 10 for variably displaying an ordinary symbol capable of identifying each of the effect display devices 9 is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of fluctuating display of the numbers 0-9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). Moreover, the small display is formed, for example, in a square shape.

  When the game ball passes the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. Then, when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol. For example, symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 15 is closed for a predetermined time, which is disadvantageous for the player for a predetermined number of times. Changes to a player's open position. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls having passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time the game ball passes to the gate 32, that is, whenever the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 increases the number of lighted LEDs by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  In addition, above the effect display device 9, an accessory 12 is provided. The accessory 12 is located between the game board 6 and the effect display device 9 and can be displaced by the accessory motor 17. The accessory 12 is usually located in a place that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, and moves to a position (for example, a position in front of the effect display device 9) visible to the player when a predetermined effect is performed.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 where a non-winning hit ball is taken. In the upper left and right upper and lower left of the game area 7, four speakers 27 are provided for producing sound effects and sounds as a predetermined sound output. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In addition, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a "card unit") that enables ball lending by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown).

  In the hit type table in FIG. 2, for each hit type in the big hit, the big hit probability after the end of the big hit gaming state, the base after the end of the big hit gaming state, the fluctuation time after the big hit gaming state end, the number of times open in big hit ( The number of rounds) and the open time of each round are shown.

  Specifically, in the big hit gaming state, after the special variable winning prize ball device 20 is put into the open state, a predetermined open state end condition (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds in the open state) has elapsed, or, In response to the establishment of the open end condition that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated, the closed state is established. Then, when the open end condition is satisfied, the continuation right is generated, and the special variable winning prize ball device 20 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times of opening in the jackpot gaming state reaches 15 rounds (final round) where the predetermined upper limit is reached.

  Of the "big hit", after being controlled to the big hit gaming state, there is a high probability of being determined to be a big hit as a special gaming state as compared to the normal state (a normal gaming state which is not a definite change state) The type (classification) of the jackpot that shifts to (abbreviation of probability fluctuation state, also referred to as high probability state) is called “probability variation jackpot”. Further, in the present embodiment, when the special gaming state is controlled to be in a short time state in which the variation time (variation display period) of the special symbol or the representation pattern is shortened as compared with the non-time-short state in addition to the probability variation state. There is. Note that the special game state may be controlled to be in the time saving state independently of the probability change state.

  In this way, by shifting to the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the rendering symbol is shortened, so when it becomes the time saving state, the effective start winning is likely to occur and the big hit game may be performed. Increase. In addition, the type (class) of the big hit which does not shift to a definite change state after being controlled by the big hit game state of 15 rounds among "big hit" is called "usually big hit".

  Also, as the special gaming state, accompanying the probability changing state or the time saving state, the frequency of the game ball entering the variable winning ball device 15 is increased by increasing the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. There is a case where it is controlled to the electronic control unit control state that facilitates (higher approach, higher frequency) winning on the variable winning ball device 15. Since the electronic control support state is a high base state as described later, it will be mainly referred to as a high base state in the following description.

  Here, the electronic Chu support control will be described. As the electric chew support control, the control (normal symbol shortening control) to reduce the fluctuation time of normal symbol (time from the start of fluctuation display to the derivation display of display result) and derive the display result early (normal symbol shortening control), ordinary symbol Control to increase the probability that the stop symbol will hit the symbol (normal symbol probability change control), control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 (opening time extension control), and increase the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened Control (control to increase the number of times of release) is performed. When such control is performed, the time ratio at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is higher than when the control is not performed, so that the frequency of winning to the second start winning opening 14 As a result, the game ball is more likely to get a start winning (the condition for executing variable display on the special symbol displays 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 is more likely to be established). As a result of this control, the frequency of winning on the second start winning opening 14 is increased, so that the frequency of establishment of the second start condition and / or the frequency of execution of variation display of the second special symbol is increased.

  The state (high frequency state) in which the winning frequency to the second start winning opening 14 is increased by the electric chew support control is the ratio of the number of gaming balls paid out as the winning balls according to the winning to the number of firing balls The "base" is referred to as the "high base state" because it is in a higher state than when the control is not performed. Also, when such control is not performed, it is called "low base state". Further, such control is control for facilitating winning on the variable winning ball device 15 by supporting the winning with the variable winning ball device 15, ie, the electric tulip, and is called "electric chew support control".

  In this embodiment, the term "high probability state (probability state)" and "low probability state (non-probability state)" are used as terms indicating the state of the big hit probability, and terms as a combination of base states are indicated. , "High base state (power chew support control state)" and "low base state (non-power chew support control state)" are used.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the terms “low probability low base state”, “low probability high base state”, and “high probability high base state” are used as terms indicating the combination of the jackpot probability state and the base state. Use. The "low probability low base state" is a state indicating that the state of the jackpot probability is a low probability state and the base state is a low base state. The “low probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the jackpot probability is a low probability state and the base state is a high base state. The “high probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the jackpot probability is a high probability state and the base state is a high base state.

  As shown in FIG. 2, as the jackpots of 15 rounds, a plurality of kinds of jackpots, usually a jackpot and a definite variation jackpot, are provided. Usually, the big hit is a big hit controlled to the non-probability state, the short time state, and the high base state (low probability high base state) after the end of the 15 round big hit gaming state. In the normal big hit, the condition that the non-probability state continues until the next big hit occurs, and the time saving state and the high base state are executed a predetermined number of times of the variable display 100 times, and the next big hit And the condition until the condition occurs, whichever is earlier, until the condition is satisfied. The normal jackpot may be controlled to be a jackpot controlled to the non-probability state, the non-time-short state, and the power-less support control state (low probability low base state).

  The probability variation big hit is a jackpot in which control to shift to a probability variation status, a short time status, and a high base status (high probability high base status) is performed after the end of the 15 rounds of jackpot gaming status. In the big change big hit, the condition that the high probability high base state of this kind, until the variable indication is executed predetermined number of times a predetermined number of times or the condition that until the next big hit occurs, the earlier condition is satisfied Continue for a period of time.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) and the effect control board. Further, FIG. 3 also shows the payout control board 37 and the like. The main substrate 31 is mounted with a game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progression control), a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit Including 57. The game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer in which the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by a hardware circuit).

  In addition, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means backed up by a backup power source, a part or all of which is created in a power source substrate (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 55 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). In particular, data indicating at least the gaming state (i.e., the special symbol process flag etc.) according to the control state of the gaming control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs) the following. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another substrate other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit according to the display result of the variation display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with the set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit (for example, 65535) are set, and occurs at random timing. It has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read out is a random number value based on the fact that the start winning is when the numerical data is read out (extracted). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for giving detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. In addition, the solenoid 16 which opens and closes the variable winning prize ball device 15, and the output circuit 59 which drives the solenoid 21 which opens and closes the special variable winning prize ball device 20 which forms the big prize mouth in accordance with the command from the game control microcomputer 560 It is mounted on the substrate 31.

  In addition, the microcomputer 560 for game control, the first special symbol indicator 8a which fluctuates and displays the special symbol, the second special symbol indicator 8b, the normal symbol indicator 10 which fluctuates and displays the ordinary symbol, the first special symbol hold memory The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b and the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 is performed.

  The effect control board 80 has the effect control microcomputer 100, the ROM 102, the RAM 103, the VDP 109, the I / O port unit 105, and the like. The ROM 102 stores programs and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 102 and the RAM 103 may be incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 100. The VDP 109 cooperates with the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control of the effect display device 9.

  The effect control command for instructing effect content from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay substrate 77 which allows the signal to pass only in one direction from the main substrate 31 to the effect control substrate 80 from the main substrate 31. Is received and the variable display control of the effect display device 9 is performed, and the display control of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side is performed via the lamp driver substrate 35, and from the speaker 27 via the audio output substrate 70. Perform various kinds of effect control such as controlling the sound output of

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the trigger button 125 of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the trigger sensor 121 to the input port of the I / O port unit 105. Enter through. The effect control CPU 101 also receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the push button 120 has been detected, from the push sensor 124 via the input port of the I / O port unit 105. Do. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation with respect to the operation stick of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 and an input of the I / O port unit 105. Enter via port. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the stick controller 122 to vibrate by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port of the I / O port unit 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives the accessory motor 17 via the motor drive circuit (not shown) to operate the accessory 12.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view showing each random number. In FIG. 4, the type of random number, the update range, the application, and the addition condition are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

  (1) Random R: A random counter for determining whether or not to make a big hit. The random R is updated one by one at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, added and updated up to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated from 0 again. (2) Random 1 (MR1): Determine the type of big hit (type, normal big hit, and any kind of probability variation big hit) and the big hit symbol (for big hit type determination, for big hit symbol determination). (3) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination). (4) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 4 (MR 4): It is determined whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination). (6) Random 5 (MR 5): The initial value of random 4 is determined (for random 4 initial value determination).

  In this embodiment, as a big hit that is a specific gaming state, a plurality of types, usually a big hit and a probability variation big hit, are included. Therefore, when it is determined to be a big hit based on the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), the type of the big hit is any of these big hits based on the value of the big hit type determination random number (random 1). It is decided on the type. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) at the same time. Therefore, random 1 is also a jackpot symbol determination random number.

  In addition, first, the variation pattern type is determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and the variation pattern is included in the determined variation pattern type using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) Determine the fluctuation pattern of As such, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process. The variation pattern type is one in which a plurality of variation patterns are grouped according to the feature of the variation mode. One or more fluctuation patterns belong to the fluctuation pattern type. The variation pattern type may be called a variation type.

  In this embodiment, the fluctuation patterns are classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type which is a fluctuation pattern type without a reach and a reach fluctuation pattern type which is a fluctuation pattern type with a reach.

  Such a variation pattern type is set to be different because the selection ratio of the variation pattern type is different between the time saving state and the time non-saving state, when the display result is a loss. , The fluctuation time is shortened compared to when not in the time saving state. For example, in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation pattern is set shorter than that in the time shortening, in order to shorten the average time of fluctuation time as compared with the time not being time saving state. The rate at which the variation pattern type with a short time is selected increases, and even when the reach type is selected, the rate at which the variation pattern of normal reach with the shortest variation time is selected among the variation pattern types is set to be high. By doing this, the average time of the fluctuation time becomes shorter than when not in the short time state.

  In addition, such fluctuation pattern classification is set by the fact that the selection ratio differs when the number of pending storages of each special symbol which fluctuates indicates more than predetermined number and when it is less than predetermined number, When the number of pending storages of each special symbol to display variable is more than a predetermined number, compared to the case where the number of pending storages of each special symbol is less than a predetermined number, the control for reducing the number of holdings is performed. You may do it. For example, in the pending number reduction control state, the rate at which the variation pattern type having a short variation display time such as the normal variation pattern type is selected is set to be higher than in the non-pending number reduction control state. The average time of the variable display time may be shorter than in the non-holding number reduction control state. Further, in the pending number reduction control, the variation display time itself of the variation pattern type may be shortened even when the same variation pattern type is selected, as compared with the case where the pending number reduction control state is not set.

  The variation pattern is not a two-step determination method of determining the variation pattern after determining the variation pattern type, but may be a one-step determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the big hit determination table and the big hit type determination table. FIG. 5A is an explanatory view showing the big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state which is not a definite change state, that is, a non-probability change state).

  Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 5 (A) is set as a big hit judgment value in the normal time jackpot determination table, and it is described in the right column of FIG. 5 (A) in the probability variation big hit judgment table. Each value is set as a big hit judgment value. The big hit judgment value set in the big change judgment big hit judgment table is changed to the big hit judgment value (usually called the big hit judgment value or the 1st big hit judgment value) common to the big hit judgment value set in the normal time big hit judgment table Due to the addition of the unique big hit judgment value, a large number (10 times the number) of big hit judgment values (referred to as a positive change time jackpot judgment value or a second big hit judgment value) greater than the probability change time big hit judgment table is set. . As a result, in the probability change state, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), but the big hit determination random number value is as shown in FIG. If it matches with any of the shown big hit judgment values, it is decided to make it a big hit (usually a big hit or a probability variation big hit) for the special symbol. The “probability” shown in FIG. 5A indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit.

  FIGS. 5B and 5C are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 54. FIG. FIG. 5 (B) is a case where the jackpot type is determined using the suspension storage (also referred to as the first suspension storage) based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening 13 (variation display of the first special symbol is Is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) to be used). FIG. 5C shows the case where the jackpot type is determined using the suspension storage (also referred to as a second suspension storage) based on the game ball winning in the second start winning opening 14 (variation display of the second special symbol is Is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used when it is performed).

  For each of the first and second special symbol big hit classification determination tables of FIG. 5 (B) and FIG. 5 (C), when it is determined that the variation display result is a big hit design, for the big hit classification determination Based on the random number (Random 1), the type of the big hit is determined to be either "normal big hit" or "probably big hit" and is referred to determine the big hit symbol.

  The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 5B is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1, and is a judgment value corresponding to each of “normal big hit” and “probable variation big hit” (big hit type determination Value) is set. The second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 5C is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1, and is a judgment value corresponding to each of “normal big hit” and “probable variation big hit” (big hit type determination Value) is set.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5B and 5C, the big hit classification determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit design determination value) for determining the big hit symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to "normally big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "3" of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "probable variation big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "7" of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Using the jackpot classification determination table, the CPU 56 determines the classification corresponding to the jackpot classification judgment value in which the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot classification, and determines the jackpot design in which the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot design Do. Thereby, the big hit type and the big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit type are determined at the same time.

  The first special symbol big hit classification determination table in FIG. 5B and the second special symbol big hit classification determination table in FIG. 5C have the same proportion determined as the probability variation big hit. In such a case, it is not necessary to divide the big hit classification determination table by the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Also, when selecting a big hit type from among a plurality of big hit types with different maximum round numbers in the big hit gaming state as a big hit type, the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. The ratio in which the jackpot type having a large number of rounds is selected may be set to be higher than the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of (B). In this way, in the high base state, the type selection of the big hit becomes advantageous to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. Also, the second special symbol big hit classification determination table of FIG. 5 (C) may have a higher probability of being determined as a probability variation big hit than the first special symbol big hit classification determination table of FIG. 5 (B) . By doing so, the variation display of the second special symbol can increase the ratio of the probability variation big hit as compared to the variation display of the first special symbol. Further, the ratio of the first special symbol jackpot classification determination table to be determined as the probability variation jackpot may be higher than that of the second special symbol jackpot classification determination table.

  Next, a variation pattern table used to select and determine variation patterns of special symbols and effect symbols in the game control microcomputer 560 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a table showing the variation pattern table used to determine the variation pattern.

  In FIG. 6, (a) shows a judgment table at the time of normal state deviation, and (b) shows a judgment table at the time of short time state. Also, (c) is a normal big hit time determination table, and (d) is a probability variable big hit time determination table. Each determination table of FIGS. 6A to 6D is stored in the ROM 54, is selected according to the game state, and is used to determine (determine) the fluctuation pattern type and the fluctuation pattern.

  The determination table shown in FIG. 6 includes a variation pattern type determination table indicating the relationship between random 2 and variation pattern types, and a variation pattern determination table indicating the relationship between random 3 and variation patterns belonging to each type for each variation pattern type. Including.

  In the column of “variation pattern type” or “variation pattern” in each table of FIG. 6, “normal” or “normal variation” indicates a normal variation pattern that is not a reach.

  Also, “normal reach” in each table in FIG. 6 indicates a variation pattern of normal reach that does not execute particularly flashy effects when reaching the reach state. "Super reach" (SP reach) indicates a variation pattern that performs reach effect that displays a special effect image when reaching a reach state.

  Further, as described above, “super reach” is a variation pattern in which the proportion to be selected as a big hit is high compared to “normal reach” and the reliability as a big hit is high. Furthermore, “super reach” is a change pattern in which the change time is longer (for example, normal reach 10 seconds, super reach 50 seconds to 80 seconds) compared to “normal reach”. In addition, four types of fluctuation patterns are set in the super reach, and the big hit expectation degree (big hit is achieved because the first super reach <second super reach <third super reach <fourth super reach). Indicates that the possibility is high.

  "Expected degree" is a concept including an expected degree for a big hit, an expected degree for a definite change, and the like. Specifically, the degree of expectation for the big hit (also referred to as the degree of reliability) is the degree of expectation for the big hit (proportion of becoming the big hit) when each reach variation pattern is selected, and for example, the reach variation is performed 100 times If the jackpot hits 60 times, the expectation for the jackpot becomes 60% (the appearance rate (probability) that the jackpot appears 60%). Further, the degree of expectation for the probability change means the degree of expectation (probability change ratio) to shift to the probability change state.

  Note that the fluctuation pattern shown in the judgment table at the time of disconnection is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the fluctuation display is the display result of “off”. The fluctuation pattern shown in the normal jackpot determination table is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the fluctuation display is the display result of “normal jackpot”. The variation pattern shown in the probability variation big hit determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation indication is the display result of “probability variation big hit”.

  Based on these pieces of information, for example, the fluctuation pattern “fourth super reach (80 seconds)” shown in the “variation pattern” column of FIG. It is shown that it is "the fluctuation pattern of the 4th super reach performed in seconds."

  In the table of FIG. 6, the fields described as “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” have a function as a variation pattern type determination table unit indicating the relationship between “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” It is a column shown. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, for each of a plurality of fluctuation pattern types such as “normal”, “normal reach” and “super reach”, all values of random 2 (1 to 251) are plural. It is divided into the numerical range of. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, if the value of random 2 extracted at a predetermined timing matches one of the judgment values allocated to 140 to 229 among the random numbers from 1 to 251, for example It is determined that “normal reach” is set as the fluctuation pattern type.

  Further, in the table of FIG. 6, the columns described as “random 3 range” and “variation pattern” indicate the function as a variation pattern determination table unit indicating the relationship between “random 3 range” and “variation pattern”. It is a column. The variation patterns indicated correspondingly to the various types of the variation pattern type determination table are the variation patterns belonging to each type. For example, taking Fig. 6 (a) as an example, the variation patterns belonging to the type of "super reach" are "first super reach", "second super reach", "third super reach", and "third 4 super reach.

  All the values of random 3 (1 to 220) are divided into a plurality of numerical value ranges and allocated to each of the plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each fluctuation pattern type. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, when it is determined that the variation pattern type of "super reach" is selected, one of random numbers 1 to 220 extracted from random 3 at a predetermined timing is 1 If it matches with any numerical value of the judgment value allocated to 70, it is determined that it will be set as the fluctuation pattern of "the 1st super reach (50 seconds)."

  When the variation display result for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is out, in order to determine the variation pattern, the determination table is selected as follows. In the non-short time state, when the fluctuation display result is out, the normal state out time determination table of FIG. 6A is selected. On the other hand, in the time saving state, when the fluctuation display result is released, the time saving state determination table of FIG. 6B is selected. Note that, by using the determination tables of FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B, the reach ratio at the time of the normal state shift and at the time shift state is fixed regardless of the number of reservations.

  When the variation display result is a big hit for the first special symbol or the second special symbol regardless of whether or not the time saving state, in order to determine the variation pattern, the determination table is selected as follows. When the variable display result is usually a big hit, the normal big hit determination table of FIG. 6C is selected. When the variation display result is a probability variation big hit regardless of whether the time saving state or not, the probability variation big hit time determination table of FIG. 6D is selected.

  In the time reduction state deviation determination table of FIG. 6B, the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation is set shorter than that of the normal state deviation determination table of FIG. 6A. 6B is shorter than the reach fluctuation (including normal reach fluctuation and super reach fluctuation) in the judgment table at the time reduction state at time shift state compared to the judgment table at the time of normal state loss in FIG. 6A. The ratio determined by normal fluctuation (non-reach is not a deviation fluctuation (a fluctuation resulting in deviation display result)) is high, and the ratio by which fluctuation time is longer than normal fluctuation is determined as a reach fluctuation is low. Data is set.

  As a result, as compared with the non-time-short state (normal state), since the ratio in which the fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time is selected is higher in the time-short state, the non-time-short state is the one in the time-short state. The fluctuation display is performed with the fluctuation time shorter on average than at the time of. By selecting the determination table in this manner, the time saving state can be realized. In addition, by setting the fluctuation time to be shorter in the time-shortened state than in the non-time-shortened state, it is possible to shorten the reserve digestion in the time-shortened state.

  In the judgment tables of FIG. 6 (a) and FIG. 6 (b), which are selected when they become out of place, the data is set so that the selection ratio of reach type is selected by the height relationship such that normal reach> super reach. It is done. On the other hand, in the determination tables of FIG. 6C and FIG. 6D selected when the big hit is made, the selection ratio of the reach type is selected according to the high / low relationship of the ratio such as normal reach <super reach Data is set. As a result, when reaching a big hit, the ratio at which the reach effect of the super reach is performed (the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach when the reach is selected) becomes higher than at the time of the disengagement. The presentation can increase the player's sense of expectation.

  Further, in the determination table of FIG. 6 (d) selected when the big hit is a definite variation big hit, compared to the determination table of FIG. 6 (c), which is usually selected when the big hit is a big hit, The data is set such that the rate at which the type of super reach effect is selected is high. As a result, the ratio at which the reach effect of the super reach is performed (the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach at the time the reach is selected) becomes higher when the probability change big hit becomes, compared to the time when the big hit normally occurs. The reach effect of the reach can be performed to increase the player's expectation for the probability variation big hit.

  In addition, such fluctuation pattern, when the sum total reservation memory number (total value) of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol to display variable is more than predetermined number (for example, the total number of reservation memory is 3 or more) By setting the selection ratio to be different when it is less than the predetermined number, when the total number of pending storages is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the total number of pending storages is less than the predetermined number. It is also possible to execute the pending number shortening control in which However, even under conditions where the number-of-holds reduction control is executed (for example, the total number of held memories is 3 or more), the sense of reach can be maintained by making the ratio of reach (including normal reach and super reach) constant. In addition, among the reach, only the super reach may not be shortened, and the on-hold time reduction control may be performed. Furthermore, the pending number time reduction control may be executable by selecting the fluctuation time as a short percentage of normal fluctuation with a short fluctuation time, or may be performed by shortening the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern itself, The combination may be sufficient.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG. In the game control microcomputer 560, as shown in FIG. 7, various effect control commands are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in accordance with the game control state.

  Main commands in FIG. 7 will be described. The command 80XX (H) is a production control command (variation pattern command) for specifying a variation pattern of the production design that is variably displayed on the presentation display 9 in response to the variation display of the special symbol (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX ). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns which can be used as shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of the effect symbol.

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are display result specification commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type.

  The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is started. The command 8F00 (H) is a command (design confirmation designation command) for designating the end of the variation of the first and second special symbols.

  The command A 001 to A 002 (H) is a jackpot start designation command for designating a jackpot game state start for each jackpot type (usually a jackpot or a probability variation jackpot).

  The command A1XX (H) is a large winning opening open designation command indicating a display of the number of times (round) of the special winning opening opening indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a designated command after opening a big winning opening, which indicates after opening (closing) a special winning opening of the number (round) indicated by XX.

  The commands A301 to A302 (H) are jackpot end designation commands for designating a jackpot gaming state end for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

  Command A 401 (H) is a first start prize designation command for designating that there has been a first start prize. The command A 402 (H) is a second start prize designation command for designating that there has been a second start prize.

  The command B 000 (H) is a normal state designation command which designates that the gaming state is the normal state (low probability state). The command B 001 (H) is a time saving state designating command specifying that the gaming state is the time saving state (high base state). The command B 002 (H) is a definite change state designation command which specifies that the gaming state is a definite change state (high probability state).

  The command C0XX (H) is a combined holding storage number specifying command indicating the total number of pending storages. The command C100 (H) is a total storage total storage number subtraction designation command indicating that the total total storage storage number is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the combined holding and storing number specifying command is used at the start winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (for example, at the time of execution of starting opening switch passing processing described later). , Sent to the effect control microcomputer 100. Further, the total reserve storage number subtraction designation command is sent to the effect control microcomputer 100 at the start of the variable display (for example, at the time of executing the special symbol change display process described later). The combined hold storage specification command and the storage storage number subtraction specification command may be combined. For example, the total pending storage number specification command may be used as a command that can specify the pending storage number after subtraction. It should be noted that a command capable of specifying the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is transmitted as the total pending storage number, and the effect control microcomputer 100 transmits the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number. The total value of the sums may be specified as the total pending storage number.

  The command C2XX (H) and the command C3 XX (H) are the winning determination results of the big hit determination, big hit type determination, fluctuation pattern type determination, etc. at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 It is an effect control command indicating the content. Among these, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not to be a big hit among the winning determination results, and a determination result of the type of the big hit. Further, command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating the determination result (determination result of variation pattern type) of which determination value range the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is among the winning determination results. It is.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the jackpot, the type of the jackpot, and the value of the variation pattern type determination random number fall within the range of which determination value at the start winning combination. . Then, a value for designating a big hit and a value for designating a type of a big hit are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. A value designating the range of the determination value as the determination result of the variation pattern type is set in the EXT data of the variation type command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or not, and the type of the big hit at the start winning, based on the value set in the symbol designation command. The fluctuation pattern type can be recognized based on the fluctuation type command.

  Next, a configuration example of an area (hold storage buffer) for storing data (hold storage data) such as random numbers corresponding to the hold storage on the game control microcomputer 560 side will be described. The pending storage buffer is provided in the RAM 55.

  In the first pending storage buffer, a saving area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first pending storage number is secured. In the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer, a big hit determination random number (random R) which is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) which is a software random number, and a variation pattern type determination random number (Random 2) and a variation pattern determination random number (Random 3) are stored.

  The CPU 56 extracts such random number values from the random number circuit 503 and the random counter for generating the software random number based on the winning on the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14, and (1) A process of saving (storing) in the save area of the pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer is executed. Specifically, these random number values are extracted based on the winning of the first start winning opening 13 and are stored in the first hold storage buffer. Also, based on the winning on the second start winning opening 14, these random number values are extracted and stored in the second hold storage buffer.

  It may be indicated as "stored on hold" that the information on the start winning combination as described above is stored in the first held storage buffer or the second held storage buffer. The random number for fluctuation pattern type determination (random 2) and the random number for fluctuation pattern judgment (random 3) are not extracted at the start winning combination and stored in advance in the storage area, but the fluctuation pattern setting process (special It may be extracted at the time of the start of fluctuation of the symbol).

  The data stored in the reserve storage buffer in this way is read out at the start winning combination and used for preview advance notice effect as described later, and also read out at the start of variable display and used for variable display.

  When there is a start winning on the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, it is referred to as a symbol designating command, a variation type command, a first (second) starting winning designating command, and a combined hold storage number designating command. A command indicating the determination result of the start winning determination process is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In the start winning winning time reception command buffer provided in the RAM 103 of the effect control microcomputer 100, the received symbol specifying command, variation type command, first (second) start winning winning specification command, and total pending storage number specifying command And the like, so that a storage area for storing data that can specify the received command is secured so that various commands such as can be stored in association with each other.

  In this embodiment, the effect control pattern of the effect pattern performed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponds to the change pattern of the plural types, the change display operation of the effect pattern, reach It is comprised from the data etc. which show the control content of various performance operation | movements, such as a production | presentation display operation in production etc. or various production | production operation | movement which does not accompany the fluctuation | variation display of a production | presentation pattern. Further, the notice effect control pattern is composed of data etc. indicating the control content of the effect operation to be the notice effect to be executed corresponding to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations performed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are composed of data indicating the control content.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game control microcomputer 560 on the main substrate 31 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically taken for a predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is executed. As a result, various game control can be performed.

  In the main processing, for example, necessary initialization processing, initialization processing at normal time, gaming state recovery processing at times other than normal, random number circuit setting processing (initial setting of random number circuit 503), random number update processing for display (variation pattern The determination of the type of the object, the update process of various random numbers such as the change pattern determination), and the update process of the initial value random number (update process of the initial value of the count value of the random number generation counter for determination per symbol).

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S (hereinafter simply referred to as "S") 20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process is performed to detect whether or not the power-off signal is output (is turned on or not) (S20). Next, detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input through the input driver circuit 58, and the state of them is determined (switching process: S21) .

  Next, the CPU 56 displays the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the normal symbol display 10, the first special symbol hold memory indicator 18a, the second special symbol hold memory indicator 18b, the ordinary symbol A display control process is performed to control display of the hold storage indicator 41 (S22). With regard to the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the normal symbol display 10, control is performed to output a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. Run.

  In addition, processing is performed to update the count value of each counter for generating random numbers for determination such as a random number per determination for a regular symbol and a random number for big hit classification determination used for game control (random number update processing for determination: S23) . The CPU 56 further performs processing for updating the initial value random number and the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (initial value random number updating process, display random number updating process: S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (S26). In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is executed according to the special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening in a predetermined order, and the special symbol process is performed. The value of the flag is updated according to the game state.

  Then, a normal symbol process process is performed (S27). In the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding processing according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order, and changes the value of the normal symbol process flag to the gaming state Update accordingly.

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending out the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: S28). Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as big hit information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hole management computer, for example (S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a winning ball process for setting the number of winning balls based on the detection signals of the first starting opening switch 13a, the second starting opening switch 14a and the count switch 23 (S30).

  In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to the ON / OFF of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content is output to the output port (S31: output processing).

  The CPU 56 also performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( S32).

  Furthermore, the CPU 56 performs normal symbol display control processing of setting normal symbol display control data for performing effect display of normal symbols according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data ( S33). Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt enabled state is set (S34), and the process ends. By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every predetermined time.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process processing (S26). In the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, start opening switch passage processing is executed (S312). Then, depending on the internal state, one of the processes in S300 to S307 is performed.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the RAM 55 stores, as described above, pending storage data (first pending storage data) such as a jackpot determination random number obtained based on the starting winning at the first starting winning opening 13. A second holding storage buffer for storing holding storage data (second holding storage data) such as a jackpot determination random number obtained based on the start winning for the second start winning opening 14; Is provided. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the number of storages of each pending storage is secured in each of these pending storage buffers.

  In the starting opening switch passing process, if the first starting opening switch 13a is turned on, the number of first holding storage data stored under the condition that the first number of holding storages has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the first reserved memory number counter that counts the number is incremented by 1, and numerical data from the random number circuit 503 or the counter for generating software random numbers (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination Processing for extracting (random numbers) and storing them in the storage area of the first pending storage buffer. Furthermore, the value of the combined pending storage number counter is increased by 1, and processing is performed to save (store) data indicating “first” in the pending specific area corresponding to the value of the combined pending storage number counter after summation. On the other hand, if the second start port switch 14a is turned on, the number of second pending storage data is counted on condition that the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the pending storage number counter is increased by 1, and numeric data (for example, a random number for big hit determination, a random number for variation pattern type determination, and a random number for variation pattern determination) are extracted from the random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating software random numbers. And store them in the storage area of the second pending storage buffer. Further, the value of the total hold storage number counter is increased by 1, and processing is performed to save (store) data indicating “second” in the hold specific area corresponding to the value of the total hold storage number counter after the addition.

  The processes of S300 to S307 are the following processes. The special symbol normal process (S300) is a process of determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, and determining the big hit type in the case of a big hit. The variation pattern setting process (S301) counts the variation time according to the determination of the variation pattern (determination of the variation pattern type determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number) and the determined variation pattern Is a process for controlling the start of counting of the fluctuation time timer.

  The display result designation command transmission process (S302) is a process for performing control of transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. The special symbol variation processing (S303) is processing for advancing the process to the special symbol stop processing when the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting processing has elapsed. Special symbol stop processing (S304), when the lapse of the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is counted by the fluctuation time timer, the fluctuation display in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b A process of stopping and deriving and displaying a stop symbol.

  The special winning opening opening pre-processing (S305) is processing for performing control to open the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 20 according to the type of the big hit. In the big winning opening open process (S306), control to transmit the production control command for round display production in the big hit gaming state to the microcomputer 100 for effect control, and confirms the establishment of the closing condition of the big winning opening It is a process which performs a process etc. When the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the process proceeds to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (S305). In addition, when all the rounds are finished, it moves to the big hit end processing (S307). The big hit end process (S307) is a process for performing control or the like to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended.

  Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing effect control main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80.

  When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the effect control main processing. In the effect control main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 2 ms) of effect control (S701) ). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the effect control main process, when the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703), and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command, and sets data such as a flag that can specify what the received effect control command indicates. Processing (for example, processing for storing data capable of specifying the received command in various command storage areas provided in the RAM 103) is performed (command analysis processing: S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (S705). In the effect control process, in order to perform various effects such as fluctuation display of the effect design on the effect display device 9 according to the contents of the effect control command analyzed in S704, the current control of each process according to the control state The process corresponding to the state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute effect control.

  Next, random numbers used by the effect control microcomputer 100 (SR1-1 for determining the left stop symbol for the production symbol, SR1-2 for determining the middle symbol for the production symbol, SR1-3 for determining the right stop symbol for the production symbol Etc.) is executed (S706). Each of such random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 is generated by counting of a random counter that updates the count value by software, and is cyclically updated within a predetermined range for each, It is used as a random number by being extracted at a defined timing.

  Next, a hold storage display control process is performed to control the display state of the hold display in the hold display area (move, delete, etc. of the hold display) (S707).

  By such effect control main processing being executed, in the effect control microcomputer 100, according to the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 and received, the effect display device 9, various lamps, and By controlling the rendering devices such as the speakers 27L and 27R, various types of rendering control according to the gaming state are performed.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, after the effect control CPU 101 executes the pre-reading effect process (S700) for determining whether or not to execute pre-reading effect, and selecting the type of pre-reading effect, the value of the effect control process flag One of the processes in S800 to S807 is performed in accordance with.

  In the effect control process, the following process is performed. In the effect control process processing, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and the variable display of the effect symbol is realized, but the control regarding the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second special symbol The control regarding the fluctuation display of the production design synchronized with the fluctuation of is also executed in one production control process process.

  The pre-reading effect process (S700) is a process for performing pre-reading determination such as whether or not pre-reading effect is to be executed, and determining an effect mode when performing pre-reading effect. With pre-reading effect, before the order of the fluctuation display (pattern fluctuation) of the special symbol based on certain holding information (holding memory information) arrives, the holding information is prefetched and the special symbol fluctuation based on the holding information It is rendering technology such as giving notice at a stage prior to the determination of the content of the display and what will be the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the future. For example, when the hold information is a big hit, it is possible that a big hit may occur later based on the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information before the variable display by the hold information is executed. An effect such as giving notice is performed as a pre-reading effect. Hereinafter, the variable display based on the hold information targeted for the pre-reading effect will be referred to as “target variable display”.

  The variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) is a process for performing a process of confirming whether or not the variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. If the variation pattern command has been received, the process shifts to rendering symbol variation start processing.

  The effect symbol variation start process (S801) is a process for controlling to start the change display of the effect symbol (decorative pattern). The effect symbol variation process (S802) is a process for controlling the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern. The effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S803) is a process for stopping the fluctuation display of the effect symbol (decoration pattern) and performing control for deriving and displaying the display result of the fluctuation display (final stop symbol).

  The big hit display process (S804) is a process for performing display control such as control for displaying a fanfare effect for notifying the occurrence of a big hit on the effect display device 9 after the fluctuation time ends. The in-round process (S805) is a process of performing display control in the round. When the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not ended, the process proceeds to the round post-processing, and if the final round is ended, the process proceeds to the big hit end processing. The post-round process (S806) is a process of performing display control between rounds. When the round start condition is satisfied, the processing shifts to the processing during the round. The jackpot end effect processing (S 807) is processing for performing display control to notify the player that the jackpot gaming state has ended in the effect display device 9.

  The effect control CPU 101 is a process stored in the ROM 102 during a predetermined effect control period from the start of the fluctuation display to the stop of the fluctuation display and from the start of the big hit gaming state to the end of the big hit gaming state. Control of the rendering device (component for rendering) such as the rendering display device 9 is performed according to the process data set in the table.

  The process table is configured of process timer set values and data in which a plurality of combinations of display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data etc. is described which indicates the aspect of each variation constituting the variation aspect during the variation time (variation display time) of the variation display of the rendering symbol (decor pattern). Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Moreover, the fluctuation time in the aspect of the fluctuation | variation is set to the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Such a process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

[About identification information]
Next, identification information used in the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, in the effect display device 9, the effect symbols as the plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each are variably displayed. The effect pattern as the identification information is composed of numeral information (number) as the first information and decoration information (character) as the second information. An image showing a numeral as the first information and an image showing a character as the second information are respectively associated with one to one. The first information may be kanji characters, alphabetic characters, predetermined marks or symbols, and the like. Further, the second information may be an effect display etc. other than the character, and may be a decoration display matching the motif of the first information.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the relationship between the first information and the second information. As shown in FIG. 12, the "character A" is associated with the numeral "1", the "character B" is associated with the numeral "2", and the numeral "3" is associated. Then, the "character C" is associated, the "character D" is associated with the numeral "4", the "character E" is associated with the numeral "5", and the numeral " "Character F" is associated with 6 "," character G "is associated with" 7 ", and" character H "is associated with" 8 ". The "character I" is associated with the numeral "9".

  In the display pattern of the identification information, a first display pattern for displaying numeric information (numbers) without displaying decoration information (characters), and a second display pattern for displaying numeric information (numbers) and decoration information (characters) Is provided. The display mode is changed by changing the number information (number) as the first information and the decoration information (character) as the second information to the first display pattern or the second display pattern in the variable display. ing. The change of the display mode of the character as the first information and the second information in the variable display will be described below.

[About the display mode of the variable display]
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an aspect of the variable display. In particular, FIG. 13 shows a display mode at the time of shortening fluctuation. At the time of shortening fluctuation, all three symbols start to fluctuate at the same time, and all the symbols stop fluctuating simultaneously within a short fluctuation time. On the other hand, at the time of normal change, while starting to change simultaneously in three symbols, stop the change in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol and the middle symbol. In addition, at the time of shortening fluctuation, it is good also as a stop order of the same symbol as at the time of usual fluctuation, and it is good also as it starts one by one at the time of a fluctuation start.

  FIG. 13 shows the passage of time in the variable display in the order of FIGS. 13 (a) to 13 (e). FIG. 13A shows the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the start of fluctuation. At the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 13 (a), the effect pattern is stopped, and the state immediately before the start of fluctuation display is shown. On the display screen of the effect display device 9, an effect pattern as identification information formed of numbers and characters is displayed. The effect pattern formed by the numbers and the characters is displayed in a wide display range with respect to the display screen of the effect display device 9. In addition, the display range of the characters is wider for numbers and characters.

  The effect pattern formed of numbers and characters as shown in FIG. 13A becomes only numbers as shown in FIG. As described above, at the start of the fluctuation, after the effect pattern starts to be fluctuated downward, the fluctuation display by the numerals which is the first display pattern is started. 13 (a) to 13 (b), after the operation at the start of the fluctuation is executed, for example, the character is enlarged, the character is erased and the number becomes larger than before the start of the fluctuation, and only by the downward direction. Variable display is performed. FIG.13 (c) has shown the display mode of the production | presentation pattern in fluctuation | variation. The downward arrows indicate that the numbers change downward.

  FIG. 13D shows symbol actions when the variable display of the effect symbols is stopped. At the time of fluctuating stop, an operation is performed in which the three numbers fluctuating at high speed are stopped at the stop position at the center of the display screen. After that, the three numbered symbols move downward from the stop position of the symbols. The characters B, C, and H saw the screen of the effect display device 9 from the front as the symbol action at the stop position shown by the dotted line in FIG. An effect to be displayed so as to fly forward from the depth direction of time is executed. Along with the effect, the numbers are displayed in a display mode in which the numbers are further moved downward and reduced.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 13 (f), at the time of the change stop, the effect design is displayed by the second display pattern consisting of numbers and characters. Here, the display mode when changing from the second display pattern consisting of numbers and characters to the first display pattern consisting only of numbers as the fluctuation start symbol action, and the first display consisting only of numbers as the fluctuation stop symbol action The display mode when changing from the pattern to the second display pattern consisting of numbers and characters is different. For example, the movement when the character is enlarged and displayed forward at the start of fluctuation and disappears, and the character appears forward from the depth direction (rear) when the character of the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front The display mode differs depending on the movement of pressing the number. In this way, numbers and characters can be suitably displayed.

  The operation at the time of the variation stop differs depending on the character A to the character I, but the operation at the time of the start of the variation may be made common to all the symbols. In this way, at the beginning of the fluctuation, the three symbols start to move simultaneously, so that the symbol actions can be unified and the appearance can be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13, the size of the number when displaying by the second display pattern and the size of the number when displaying by the first display pattern are different. For example, the size of the numerals displayed at the start of fluctuation or at the time of fluctuation stop displayed by the second display pattern is smaller in display range than the size of numerals in fluctuation displayed by the first display pattern. In this way, the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode consisting of numbers and characters at the time of start of change or stop of change, and during change display, only the numbers can be displayed in a larger display range than at the time of stop By performing the variable display, it is possible to make it easy to recognize the transition of the effect pattern in the variable display, and it is possible to preferably display numbers and characters.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13, by moving the number downward as the symbol action at the time of variation stop, an effect of stopping the variation display is executed by the pattern which displays the character larger than the number. In this way, it is possible to add interest to the display mode when displaying numbers and characters, and to preferably display numbers and characters.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13, when the variable display is stopped, the display is performed to make the character appear wider than the display range of the number before the stop. In this way, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort when changing from the first display pattern to the second display pattern. Therefore, numbers and characters can be suitably displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 13 (d) and 13 (e), as the variation stop time symbol action, the effect is displayed such that the character flies forward from the depth direction when the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front. Be done. In this way, a powerful display using a character can be performed.

  Further, there is a correspondence relationship between numbers and characters as shown in FIG. 12, and as shown in FIG. 13, the variable display is stopped in a pattern displaying characters corresponding to the numbers. In this way, since each separate character appears in accordance with the number, the number and the character can be suitably displayed.

[About non-reach off-time symbol display pattern]
FIG. 14 is a timing chart of non-reach-off symbol display pattern. The variable display shown in FIG. 13 is executed at the timing as shown in FIG. At time t0, the variable display is started (see FIG. 13A). Next, the action at the start of fluctuation is executed over time t0 to t1 (see FIG. 13 (b)). In the action at the start of change, the effect pattern consisting of numbers and characters is only numbers, and a change display in which the numbers move downward is executed. After that, in the period T1, the variable display is performed only with numbers (see FIG. 13C).

  The fluctuation stop symbol action is executed from t2 to t3 after T1 (see FIGS. 13D and 13E). In the fluctuation stop symbol action, when the symbol displayed only with numbers stops fluctuation, it moves below the stop position, and when the character sees the screen of the effect display device 9 from the front in the empty space The effect of jumping forward from the depth direction of is executed. Also, in the fluctuation stop symbol action, when the number moves down, the character is displayed larger than the number. Then, at t3, the variable display is stopped by the second display pattern composed of numbers and characters (see FIG. 13 (f)).

  As shown in FIG. 14, the first change effect of changing from only numbers to numbers and characters is executed as the change stop action, and the second change effect to change only numbers from the numbers and characters as the change start action is performed. Run. The execution mode is different between the first change effect and the second change effect. In the variation stop time symbol action executed as the first change effect, the character jumps forward from the depth direction when the character is viewed from the front of the screen of the effect display device 9, the numbers move downward, and the characters are better than the numbers. In the fluctuation start time pattern action which is displayed largely and executed as the second change effect, the character is erased from the number and the character, and only the number displayed larger than before the change fluctuates downward. In this way, numbers and characters can be suitably displayed.

[About SP reach big hit symbol display pattern]
Next, super reach (SP reach) occurs and the symbol display pattern when it becomes a big hit is explained. FIG. 15 is a timing chart of an SP reach big hit symbol display pattern. At time t0, the variable display is started. Next, the change start action is executed from time t0 to t1. In the action at the start of change, the effect pattern consisting of numbers and characters is only numbers, and a change display in which the numbers move downward is executed. After that, during the period T1, the variable display is performed only with numbers.

  After that, at t2, as the left symbol movement stop time symbol action, the first display pattern in which the effect design symbol consists only of numbers becomes the second display pattern consisting of numbers and characters, and temporarily stopped (the symbol does not stop completely Slightly move up and down). The movement of the numbers and characters at this time is the same as that of the above-described fluctuation stop action. Next, at t3, as the right symbol fluctuation stop action, the first display pattern in which the rendering symbols consist only of numbers becomes a second display pattern consisting of numbers and characters, and it is temporarily stopped. The movement of the numbers and characters at this time is also the same as that of the above-described change stop action.

  Then, the reach formation action is executed from the state of t3 to t4. In the reach formation action, an effect of largely moving the character displayed as the second display pattern is executed. For example, by performing an effect that the character rotates in the lateral direction after reaching the reach state, an effect that shows the front and back of the character is performed. Note that the action of the character's reach formation action may be different for each character. Also, the movement of the character may be made different depending on the degree of big hit expected. In addition, at the stage of t2 and t3 until reaching the reach state, it is possible to keep the figure pattern, and at the timing of t4, the left and right numeral designs (reach design) may be a second display pattern consisting of numbers and characters.

  Thereafter, the middle symbol scrolls at high speed from the normal reach effect executed with only the number symbol, and at t5, the reach develops to the SP reach. When developing to the SP reach, the effect design shown by numerals is displayed as a small design of the display mode reduced at the corner (for example, the right corner) of the screen of the effect display device 9.

  In the period at T2 after developing to SP reach, the small character action pattern is executed. During the small symbol action pattern, the SP reach effect is executed, and the effect that the small symbol moves violently is performed. For example, during the small design action pattern, a small design may jump up and down according to the effect sound flowing in the SP reach production, and a vertical and horizontal rotation may be performed. Then, at t6, the fact that the SP reach is finished and the big hit is displayed by the symbol arrangement of only the numbers which are enlarged from the small symbols and become the normal size.

  In addition, you may make it change the pattern of a small symbol action according to the kind of SP reach (the 1st super reach-the 4th super reach etc.). Also, the operation of the small symbols may be different depending on the type of music flowing during the SP reach. In addition, the movement of the small symbols may be changed during the SP reach. Also, the operation mode of the small symbol may be made different depending on the jackpot expectation degree. Further, the small symbols may be displayed before developing into the SP reach, and the operation mode of the small symbols may be different before and after the SP reach development depending on the type of the SP reach. In this way, the operation modes of the small symbols become diverse, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  After that, at t7, an effect of returning from the background of the SP reach to the normal background is executed. Furthermore, after that, the symbol stops changing and is displayed in the second display pattern consisting of numbers and characters from the first display pattern of numbers only until the final display (the state where the symbol is completely stopped) is reached, Decide and execute the action. As the determination operation of the character, for example, an effect is performed in which it is indicated that the character has made a V-sign and the number to be the big hit display result has been determined.

  As shown in FIG. 15, since the display in which the character moves largely is performed as the action at the time of reach formation, the movement of the character can be focused and the numbers and the character can be suitably displayed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 15, at the end of the SP reach, the symbols are aligned with only numbers, and at the time of finalized display after returning to the background, the determination operation is performed with numbers and characters. In this manner, the display pattern of the effect design suitable for each scene of the effect can be obtained, and the numbers and the characters can be suitably displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15, as the small symbol action pattern B, an effect of violently moving the small symbol according to the effect sound during SP reach is executed. In this way, it is possible to preferably display the numbers as small symbols which are reduced and displayed.

  In addition, before SP reach, you may make it not display a small symbol. Specifically, before the development to the SP reach, it is possible to easily execute the effect of making the reach out with only the numbers, and thereafter, when the SP reach development is performed, the numeric symbol may be displayed as a small symbol.

  Next, processing for determining the symbol display pattern and the like will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (S801) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 performs the following process.

  In the effect symbol variation start process, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined that the variation display result is to be out (S601). Whether or not it is determined to be out of place is determined, for example, by whether or not a display result 1 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is determined to be out of order, it is checked whether a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern has been received as the fluctuation pattern command (S602). Whether or not the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern is received is determined by, for example, data stored in the variation pattern command storage area.

  When it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern is received, the display result of out-of-reach is determined as the final stop of the effect pattern using the out-of-pattern determination data table stored in the ROM 102 (S604) , S616. In the off symbol determination data table, numerical data of SR1-1 to SR1-3 are associated with each of a plurality of types of effect symbols.

  In the process of S604, numerical data (random numbers) are extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and a symbol corresponding to the extracted numerical data is left and middle, respectively, using the data design table for determining the outlying symbols. , It is determined as a combination of stop symbols that result in the fluctuation display result of the right effect symbols. Thus, when determining the combination of non-reach losing symbols, if the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number accidentally matches the combination of the big hit symbols, the correction is made to become the combination of the missing symbols (for example, Each stop symbol is determined by correcting the right symbol by shifting one symbol). Also, if the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number happens to be the reach symbol, it is corrected so that it becomes a combination of non-reach out-of-out symbols (for example, correction for shifting the right symbol by 1 symbol) and each stop symbol Is determined.

  If it is determined in the process of S602 that it is not a non-reach variation pattern (if it is determined that it is a reach variation pattern), the stop symbol of the rendering symbol constituting the combination of reach symbols is determined (S605), and the process proceeds to S616. In the process of S605, numerical data (random numbers) are extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at predetermined timings, and the symbols corresponding to the random numbers extracted from SR1-1 are used using the data design table for determining the outlying symbols. A symbol corresponding to a random number determined as the stop symbol of each of the left and right effect symbols forming the reach state and corresponding to the value of the counter extracted from SR1-2 is determined as the stop symbol of the middle symbol. Also in this case, when it happens to be a combination of big hit symbols, each stop symbol is determined by correcting (for example, correcting the middle symbol by one symbol) so as to become the combination of the out symbols.

  In addition, when it is not determined to shift in the processing of S601 (when it is determined to be a big hit) (N in S601), the CPU 101 for effect control has a big hit symbol according to the type of the big hit. The stop design of the production design which constitutes combination is decided (S603), it advances to S616.

  In S603, a combination of hit symbols is determined according to the type of the big hit as follows. The type of big hit from among the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit based on which display result specification command of the display result 2 specification command and the display result 3 specification command is stored in the display result specific command storage area If it is determined that it is decided to make a big hit in a definite variation, numerical data (random numbers) are extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and a combination of the SR1-1 and the big variation in a big design (for example, left, Using the data table (table for determining the probability of big hit symbol design) with the relationship between the middle and the right with the odd number combination such as "7,7,7" etc., any positive variation big hit symbol from the extracted value Select and decide the combination of Also, when it is determined that it is determined to be a big hit normally, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and a combination of SR1-1 and a big hit symbol (for example, left, middle, etc. Using the data table (usually a big hit design determination table) in which the right is set to a relation of "4, 4, 4", etc. with an even number of square eyes, a combination of any of the normal big hit symbols from the extraction value Choose and decide. The symbol determined in this manner is used as a final stop symbol which is a variable display result before being controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  Next, after effect setting processing (S616) for performing processing for setting various effects in the variable display, the process proceeds to S617. In the effect setting process, a symbol display pattern or the like is determined based on the type of symbol determined in S603 to S605. When determining the symbol display pattern, effects are displayed depending on whether the current fluctuation display is a normal fluctuation, a shortening fluctuation, a reach, or a development to an SP reach. Determine the display pattern and display mode of the symbol. These pieces of information may be determined by the variation pattern designation command stored in the command storage area provided in the storage area of the RAM 103.

  In S617, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of effect control patterns. In S617, the symbol variation control pattern table according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, and various effect control (rendering operation) patterns designated by the effect control pattern of the effect decided in the process of S616, etc. Among the plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in, one of the effect control patterns corresponding to the designated various effect operation patterns is selected and determined as the use pattern.

  In the control pattern table stored in the ROM 102, for example, effect display during a period from when the variation of the effect design determined in the process of S616 is started to when the final effect design that is the final stop symbol is stop displayed. Data indicating the control content of various rendering operations such as the variable display operation of the rendering pattern in the display area of the device 9, the rendering display operation in the reach rendering, the rendering display operation by the rendering of pseudo sequence, and the rendering display operation in the preliminary rendering A plurality of types of pattern variation control patterns are stored.

  In addition, each design fluctuation control pattern, for example, the production control process timer set value, the production control process timer determination value, the production display control data, the voice control data, the lamp control data, and the variation display of the production symbol The control data for controlling the various rendering operations according to the contents are included, and the contents of the various rendering control, the switching timing of the rendering control, and the like are set in time series.

  Next, a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern selected in S617 is selected (S618). Then, the process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S619).

  When the process of S619 is executed, the rendering device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, the effect component as the effect component according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) Control of various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect component is started (S620). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, a command is output to VDP 109 in order to display an image (including the effect pattern) on the effect display device 9 in accordance with the fluctuation pattern. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver substrate 35 in order to perform lighting / extinguishing control of light emitters such as various LEDs. Further, in order to cause the speaker 27 to output an audio, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio output board 70.

  Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command is set in the fluctuation display time timer (S621), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol processing (S802). Design fluctuation start processing is executed (S 622). And, the effect design fluctuation start processing ends.

[Other effects]
In the embodiment described above, the following effects may be performed. For example, a full screen preview effect may be performed. The full screen preview effect is a blackout effect such as displaying a covered image such as a darkened image DG over the entire area of the display screen of the effect display 9 at the start of fluctuation and making the display mode of the decorative pattern (effect pattern) difficult to view It is a notice effect that covers the screen. The covering image is not limited to the darkened image DG or the black image, and may be an image of a predetermined color or pattern, such as an image of a light emission mode or an image of a freeze mode. The display content of the decorative design may be an image that is difficult to visually recognize or invisible. In addition, predetermined preview effects such as full screen preview effects may be panel-type (panel display format) step-up notice, cut-in notice, story notice, mini game notice, development notice, etc. Or a notice effect displayed on at least a portion (at least a portion capable of concealing a decorative pattern), and at least the decorative pattern (for example, the display form or display content of the decorative pattern etc.) is not visible at all (zero transparency) For example, it may be a notice effect that makes it impossible to visually recognize, or a notice effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize a display screen or a decorative pattern (low in transparency).

  With reference to FIGS. 17 and 18, an example will be described in which the symbol preview effect and the reverse change are displayed in the case of the presence or absence of the full screen preview effect. FIG. 17 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative design and each notice effect etc. In (A), there is no execution of the full screen advance effect, and in (B), there is the case where the full screen advance effect is executed. . FIG. 18 shows an example of effect execution in the case shown in FIG. 17 in the start period of the super reach change display. Specifically, FIGS. 18 (A) and 18 (B1) to (E1) are examples of effect execution in the case of FIG. 17 (A), and FIGS. 18 (A) and 18 (B) to 18 (E2) are FIGS. It is an example of production | presentation execution in the case of B).

  As shown in FIG. 17A, when looking at the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, the reverse fluctuation of all the decorative symbols is started at the start of the fluctuation (timing T01), and the end of the reverse fluctuation (timing T03) The change of the decoration pattern in the forward direction is started and then the change is made at high speed, and then the change of the decoration pattern on the left and right is decelerated, the display mode of reach is reached (reach establishment), and the reach effect is executed. Moreover, if it sees each notice production etc., in Drawing 17 (A), execution of full screen notice production is determined without, and the reverse direction start display of a decoration pattern and a design notice production are started in timing T01 . The symbol advance notice effect ends at timing T02, and the reverse direction change ends at timing T03. At the end of this backward variation (timing T03), the forward variation of the decorative pattern is started. As shown in FIG. 18 (A), from the state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in the reference position Ref as shown in FIG. 18 (A), as shown in FIG. 18 (B), FIG. Movement in the opposite direction (upward direction) opposite to the direction (downward direction) starts, and a symbol notice effect as shown in FIG. 18 (B1), that is, a predetermined color (for example, blue, green) around the decorative pattern , And a red, etc.) aura (backlight) image G is displayed. Then, at the end (time T03) of the reverse direction change shown in FIG. 17A, the reverse change of the decorative symbol stops as shown in FIG. 18C1 and the decoration as shown in FIG. 18D1. The forward movement of the symbol is started, and the decorative symbol is fluctuated and displayed in the forward direction beyond the reference position Ref shown in FIG. 18 (E1).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 17B, since the execution of the full screen preview effect is determined to be present, the symbol preview effect is changed from timing T01 as an initial value to timing T03. As shown in FIG. 18 (B2), the full screen preview effect (blackout effect) is started as shown in FIG. 18 (B2), and is included in the full screen preview effect as shown in FIG. 18 (C2). A notification image such as “chance!” Is displayed, and after the end of the full screen preview effect in FIG. 18 (C2), that is, as shown in FIG. 18 (D2), when the forward direction variation of the decorative symbol is started It has been changed to start the preliminary production. That is, the start of the symbol preview effect is changed at the end of the full screen preview effect (blackout effect) shown in FIG. 18 (D2), not at the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 18 (B1). This makes it possible to prevent the symbol advance notice effect from being hidden behind the full screen advance notice effect. Although the reverse direction start display of the decorative symbol is executed without change, it is hidden behind the full screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIGS. 18 (B2) and (C2), so from the player can not see. Although the notification image shown in FIG. 18 (C2) is included in the full screen preview effect, it may be a preview that is executed separately from the full screen preview effect, or the notification image may not be displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 18 (D2), the symbol advance effect is started before the decorative pattern reaches the reference position Ref, but as shown by the alternate long and short dashed line arrow, the decorative pattern returns to the reference position Ref The symbol preview effect may be executed from the beginning. Further, although the execution period of the symbol preview effect is shorter than the execution period of the reverse fluctuation as shown in FIG. 17A, it may be the same as or longer than the execution period of the reverse fluctuation. The same applies to the case where the start is changed to the timing T03 as shown in FIG. 17 (B).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, an example will be described in which there is no execution of the symbol preview effect and the reverse change is displayed in the case of the presence or absence of the full screen preview effect. FIG. 19 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative symbol and each notice effect etc. In (A), when there is no execution of the symbol notice effect and the full screen notice effect and reverse fluctuation is executed (B) In the case, there is no execution of the symbol preview effect, and the case where the full screen preview effect and the reverse change are executed is shown. FIG. 20 shows an example of effect execution in the case shown in FIG. 19 in the start period of the super reach change display. Specifically, FIGS. 20 (A), (B1), (C1), (D) and (E) show examples of effect execution in the case of FIG. 19 (A), and FIGS. 20 (A), (B2) and (E). C2), (D), and (E) are examples of effect execution in the case of FIG. 19 (B).

  Since the variation display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 19 (A) is the same as that of FIG. 17 (A) described above, the description thereof is omitted here. Also, looking at each notice effect, etc., in FIG. 19 (A), it is decided that the full screen notice effect and the execution of the symbol notice effect are not performed, and the reverse direction start display of the decorative pattern is started at timing T01. The directional change ends at timing T03. At the end of this backward variation (timing T03), the forward variation of the decorative pattern is started. As shown in FIG. 20 (A), from the state in which the decorative symbol is determined and displayed at the reference position Ref as shown in FIG. 20 (A), as shown in FIG. 20 (B), FIG. The reverse direction (upward direction) opposite to the direction (downward direction) starts to change, and at the end of the reverse direction change (timing T03) shown in FIG. 19 (A), as shown in FIG. 20 (C1) The reverse variation of the symbol stops, and the variation in the forward direction of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. 20 (D1), and the decorative symbol changes forward in the forward direction beyond the reference position Ref shown in FIG. 20 (E1) It will be done.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 19 (B), the execution of the symbol preview effect is determined to be absent, and the execution of the full screen preview effect and the reverse direction variation is determined to be present, and the full screen advance effect and the reverse direction variation Are started at the start of fluctuation (timing T01) and both ends at timing T03. At the end of this backward variation (timing T03), the forward variation of the decorative pattern is started. As shown in FIG. 20 (B2), the full screen notice effect (blackout effect) is started as shown in FIG. 20 (B2), and the full screen notice effect is included as shown in FIG. 20 (C2). A notification image such as "chance!" Is displayed, and after the end of the full screen preview effect in FIG. 20 (C2), that is, as shown in FIG. 20 (D), forward variation of the decorative symbol is started. Although the reverse direction start display of the decorative symbol is being executed, it is hidden behind the full screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIGS. 20 (B2) and (C2), so the player can see the reverse direction. I can not see the change. Although the notification image shown in FIG. 20 (C2) is included in the full screen preview effect, it may be a preview that is executed separately from the full screen preview effect, or the notification image may not be displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 20 (D), although the variable display in the forward direction is visible before the decorative design reaches the reference position Ref, the decorative design is displayed at the reference position Ref as shown by the dashed dotted arrow. The change display in the forward direction from the returned state may be visible.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, an example will be described in which there is no execution of reverse direction fluctuation and the symbol preview effect in the case of the presence or absence of the full screen preview effect is executed. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative design and each notice effect etc. In (A), there is no execution of the full screen advance effect and the reverse direction fluctuation, and in (B) there is no execution of the reverse direction fluctuation. , Show the case where there is execution of the full screen notice effect and the symbol notice effect. FIG. 22 shows an example of effect execution in the case shown in FIG. 21 in the start period of the super reach change display. Specifically, FIGS. 22 (A) and (B1) are examples of effect execution in the case of FIG. 21 (A), and FIGS. 22 (A), (B2), (C2) and (D2) are FIGS. It is an example of production | presentation execution in the case of B).

  Since the variation display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 21 (A) is the same as FIG. 17 (A) described above, the description thereof is omitted here. Also, looking at each notice effect, etc., in FIG. 21 (A), execution of the full screen notice effect and the reverse direction change of the decorative symbol is determined without, and the symbol notice effect at the start of change (timing T01). Is started. The symbol preview effect ends at the subsequent timing T02. In addition, the fluctuation in the forward direction of the decorative symbol is also started at the start of fluctuation (timing T01). Looking at the effect execution example at this time, as shown in FIG. 22 (A), from the state in which the decorative symbol has been fixedly displayed at the reference position Ref in the previous variable display, as shown in FIG. 22 (B1) The change in the direction (downward direction) is started, and the symbol notice effect as shown in FIG. 22 (B1), that is, the aura of the predetermined color (for example, blue, green, red, etc.) An advance notice effect in which the image G of light) is displayed is also started.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 21 (B), since it is determined that the symbol preview effect and the full screen preview effect are performed, the symbol preview effect is changed from timing T01 as an initial value to timing T03. Looking at the example of effect execution at this time, the full screen preview effect (blackout effect) is started as shown in FIG. 22 (B2), and is included in the full screen preview effect as shown in FIG. 22 (C2) A notification image such as “chance!” Is displayed, and after the end of the full screen preview effect in FIG. 22 (C2), that is, as shown in FIG. 22 (D2), when the forward direction variation of the decorative symbol is started It has been changed to start the preliminary production. That is, the start of the symbol preview effect is changed at the end of the full screen preview effect (blackout effect) shown in FIG. 22 (D2), not at the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 22 (B1). This makes it possible to prevent the symbol advance notice effect from being hidden behind the full screen advance notice effect. In addition, as shown in FIG. 21B, it is determined that there is execution of the symbol preview effect and the full screen preview effect, and is determined without the execution of the reverse variation of the decorative pattern, so FIG. During the execution period of the full screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in C2), as shown in FIG. 21 (B), the swing of the decorative pattern is executed, but it is hidden behind the full screen notice effect Therefore, the player can not see the swing of the decorative pattern. The start of variation of the decorative symbol in the forward direction is changed after the end of the execution period of all the symbol preview effects. Although the notification image shown in FIG. 22 (C2) is included in the full screen advance presentation effect, it may be a notice that is executed separately from the full screen advance presentation effect, or the notification image may not be displayed.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present invention is:
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.),
Variation display means (for example, effect display device 9 or the like) for variably displaying identification information (for example, a decorative pattern or the like) in a predetermined direction;
Preview production effect execution means (for example, CPU 101 for presentation control etc.) capable of executing predetermined preview production (for example, full screen preview production etc);
Equipped with
The predetermined advance presentation effect is executed to make the display mode of the identification information invisible or hard to recognize at the start of the variable display (for example, in FIG. 18 (B2), FIG. 20 (B2) or FIG. 22 (B2) Such as blackout effect that decoration pattern such as shown becomes not visible),
In the identification information, when the predetermined advance effect is executed, it is possible to start the variable display in the predetermined direction after the execution period of the predetermined advance effect (for example, FIG. 18 (B2), FIG. As shown in FIG. 18 (D2), (E2), FIG. 20 (D), (E) or FIG. 22 (D2) after the lapse of the execution period of the blackout effect shown in FIG. 22 (B2) or FIG. For example, forward movement of the decorative pattern is started).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the movement of the identification information from being obscured, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1),
The predetermined direction may be a normal direction (for example, as shown in FIGS. 18 (D1), (D2), (E1) and (E2), the forward direction of the decorative pattern, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the movement of identification information from becoming difficult to understand.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The predetermined advance presentation effect is an effect that indicates an expectation to be in an advantageous state, and is an effect executed in a mode of hiding a part or the whole of identification information (for example, the full screen advance presentation effect is more than in the case of a loss) In the case of a big hit, it is easier to be displayed, and it may be an effect (see FIG. 18 (B2)) or the like of an aspect of hiding the whole decorative pattern.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the movement of identification information from becoming difficult to understand.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The variation display means can change and display identification information in a specific direction (for example, the reverse direction, etc.) different from the predetermined direction (for example, shown in FIG. 18 (B1) and FIG. 20 (B1) As such, the decorative symbol may be displayed in a variable direction opposite to the forward direction).

  According to such a configuration, the direction of the variable display can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4),
The variable display means variably displays identification information in the specific direction at least during an execution period of the predetermined advance effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 17B), at least in an execution period of full screen advance effect , Displaying the decorative pattern in the opposite direction, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, after the identification information is variably displayed in a specific direction, it can be variably displayed in a predetermined direction different from the specific direction, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The identification information advance notice can be executed at the start of the variable display in the predetermined direction (for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (B1) and FIG. 22 (B1) by the effect control CPU 101, the symbol advance effect can be executed) And so on).

  According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved by executing the identification information advance notice.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
When executing the identification information advance notice and the predetermined advance notice effect, the identification information advance notice is executed after the end of the predetermined advance notice effect (for example, full screen advance notice shown in FIG. 18 (C2) and FIG. 22 (C2) After the end of the effect, the symbol advance effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 18 (D2) and FIG. 22 (D2).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the identification information advance notice and the predetermined advance notice effect from being performed in duplicate at the same time, and the identification information advance notice becomes invisible or difficult to recognize by the predetermined advance notice effect. It can prevent.

Next, main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) As shown in FIG. 13, the size of the number when displaying with the second display pattern and the size of the number when displaying with the first display pattern are different. For example, the size of the numerals displayed at the start of fluctuation or at the time of fluctuation stop displayed by the second display pattern is smaller in display range than the size of numerals in fluctuation displayed by the first display pattern. In this way, the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode consisting of numbers and characters at the time of start of change or stop of change, and during change display, only the numbers can be displayed in a larger display range than at the time of stop of change. By performing the variable display, it is possible to make it easy to recognize the transition of the effect pattern in the variable display, and it is possible to preferably display numbers and characters.

  (2) There is a correspondence relationship between numbers and characters as shown in FIG. 12, and as shown in FIG. 13, the variable display is stopped in a pattern displaying characters corresponding to the numbers. In this way, since each separate character appears in accordance with the number, the number and the character can be suitably displayed.

  (3) As shown in FIG. 13, by moving the number downward as the symbol action at the time of the variation stop, an effect of stopping the variation display is executed by the pattern which displays the character larger than the number. In this way, it is possible to add interest to the display mode when displaying numbers and characters, and to preferably display numbers and characters.

  (4) As shown in FIG. 15, since the display in which the character moves largely is performed as an action at the time of reach formation, the movement of the character can be noticed and the numbers and the character can be suitably displayed.

  (5) As shown in FIG. 14, the first change effect of changing from only numbers to numbers and characters is executed as the change stop action, and the change from the numbers and characters to only numbers is performed as the change start action. Execute change presentation. The execution mode is different between the first change effect and the second change effect. In the variation stop time symbol action executed as the first change effect, the character jumps forward from the depth direction when the character is viewed from the front of the screen of the effect display device 9, the numbers move downward, and the characters are better than the numbers. In the fluctuation start time pattern action which is displayed largely and executed as the second change effect, the character is erased from the number and the character, and only the number displayed larger than before the change fluctuates downward. In this way, numbers and characters can be suitably displayed.

  (6) As shown in FIG. 15, at the end of the SP reach, the symbols are aligned with only the numbers, and when the final display after returning to the background, the determination operation is performed with the numbers and the characters. In this manner, the display pattern of the effect design suitable for each scene of the effect can be obtained, and the numbers and the characters can be suitably displayed.

  (7) As shown in FIG. 13, when the variable display is stopped, the display is performed to make the character appear wider than the display range of the number before the stop. In this way, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort when changing from the first display pattern to the second display pattern. Therefore, numbers and characters can be suitably displayed.

  (8) As shown in FIGS. 13 (d) and 13 (e), the character is displayed so as to fly forward from the depth direction when the screen of the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front as a fluctuation stop symbol action. The presentation is performed. In this way, a powerful display using a character can be performed.

  (9) As shown in FIG. 15, as the small symbol action pattern B, an effect of violently moving the small symbol according to the effect sound during SP reach is executed. In this way, it is possible to preferably display the numbers as small symbols which are reduced and displayed.

Next, modifications and feature points of the embodiment described above will be listed below.
(1) In the embodiment described above, the probability variation big hit state and the normal big hit state are provided. In addition, as the production design, odd design was corresponded to probability variation big hit, even design was usually set corresponding to big hit. Here, what is displayed in the second display pattern may be only a number corresponding to the probability variation big hit. For example, only the numbers corresponding to the probability variation big hit may be displayed as numbers and characters, and the numbers corresponding to the big hit may be displayed only without displaying the characters. In this way, it is possible to give a special feeling about the odd symbols corresponding to the probability variation big hit, and to give a special impression to the highly advantageous odd symbols. Note that among the odd symbols, only the "3" symbol or the "7" symbol may be a probability symbol, and the number of symbols displayed in the second display pattern can be changed as appropriate.

  (2) In the embodiment described above, the time-shortening state (high base state) has been reached until the variable display 100 rotations after the end of the big hit. In such a short time state, the change may be started only with numbers and the change may be stopped only with numbers. In the time saving state, since the fluctuation time is shorter than the normal state, when the character accompanied with the movement is displayed, the movement of the design becomes squeezed by displaying or deleting the character, and the appearance becomes strange. As a result, the variable display may be difficult to see. Therefore, in the time saving state, the variable display may be performed by the first display pattern of only numerals unlike the normal state. In this way, it is possible to preferably display a number in the time saving state.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, when the number display modes are different between the first display pattern displayed only by numbers and the second display pattern displayed by numbers and characters, the numbers are different in size Explained. However, as a case where the display mode of the numbers is different, the position of the numbers, the color of the numbers, the type of the numbers, etc. may be used instead of the size of the numbers, and even if any two or more combinations are met. Good. In addition, the display mode of the numbers may be different depending on the jackpot expectation.

  (4) In the embodiment described above, the case is shown where a small symbol is displayed at the corner of the screen of the effect display 9. However, among the small symbols which are reach, one may be displayed on the upper left corner of the screen and the other may be displayed on the upper right corner of the screen. Moreover, the case where a small symbol is moved up and down etc. was demonstrated as a small symbol action pattern. The movement of the small figure is not limited to these, and the pattern may be shaken, laterally rotated, or danced to dance with the music. Also, an effect image (for example, an image of a flame) may be added around the small figure.

  (5) In the embodiment described above, the effect of stopping the variable display by the pattern in which the character is displayed larger than the number is performed by moving the number downward as the symbol action at the time of the variable stop. However, as the symbol action at the time of stop of movement, the number may not be moved downward but may be moved diagonally. Specifically, when the variable display is stopped, the left symbol may be moved diagonally to the right, the middle symbol may be moved immediately below, and the right symbol may be moved to the left. In this way, the numerical symbols displayed small at the time of the stop of the movement are displayed so as to be gathered at the center and have a good appearance. In addition, the movement of the symbol action at the time of the fluctuation stop is not limited to these, and may be moved in any direction.

  (6) In the embodiment described above, the numbers and the characters correspond to one to one. However, numbers and characters do not have to correspond one to one. For example, the same character may correspond to a plurality of numbers, or the corresponding character may change depending on the background. In addition, when performing pre-reading advance notice, a plurality of times of variable display until variable display of a target to be pre-read is performed may be changed to a special stage. In this case, special numbers or characters that are not normally displayed may be displayed. In addition, it is desirable that the display pattern of numbers and characters at this time be different from that in the normal time. Note that a stage may be provided in which the variable display is performed using only numbers.

  (7) In the embodiment described above, during the variable display, it is possible to recognize whether or not the variable display is being performed to the player by changing the symbol with only numbers. It is desirable that the numbers in such a variable display be displayed lighter than the display mode at the start of the change or at the time of the stop of the change. In this way, by setting the density to the same as that at the start of the fluctuation, it is possible to prevent visual effects that are executed in the background from being difficult to visually recognize. And by displaying only with numbers rather than displaying with numbers and characters, it is possible to reduce the display area of the symbol, and while showing that the symbol is fluctuating, it is reduced that it interferes with other notices. can do.

  (8) In the embodiment described above, the symbol being reached may be the same symbol as the symbol indicated by the first display pattern in the variable display, and is a symbol different from the symbol indicated by the first display pattern May be

  (9) In the embodiment described above, the first effect of changing from only numbers to numbers and characters is executed as the change stop action, and the second change is changed to only numbers from the numbers and characters as the change start action. The case of performing the presentation has been described. At the time of execution of the change effect, the character operated, but another effect image may be added. Some change may be made to the display mode.

  (10) In the embodiment described above, it is possible to temporarily display the number to be stopped in the front and then to reduce it as the fluctuation stop symbol action. Then, the character may appear from behind the enlarged number. In this way, since the character is displayed from behind the enlarged number so as to be shown in a very large display manner, it can be a display of a more powerful character, giving a surprise to the player it can.

  (11) In the embodiment described above, a plurality of SP reach types may be provided. And you may make it a small symbol action differ by the kind of SP reach.

  (12) In the embodiment described above, the case where one character is displayed for one number is shown. However, an image other than the character may be added to one number. For example, as the variable stop action, an image may be displayed that indicates that the hold display changes with the character when the number stops (an image indicating that the hold display changes to a high hit expectation). . In this way, attention can be drawn to the fluctuation stop action. Then, by displaying the image, it is possible to make a pre-reading notice that the pending display changes.

  (13) In the embodiment described above, the jackpot gaming state has been described as a representative example as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and advantageous states advantageous to the player may include high probability state (probability state), short time state, and other advantageous states such as high base state.

  (14) In the above embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as substrates on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. However, the circuit for controlling the effect device May be mounted on one substrate. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) equipped with a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 etc. and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27R, 27L, etc.) are installed. Two substrates with the second effect control substrate may be provided.

  (15) In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits the command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 is connected to another board (for example, as shown in FIG. Sound / lamp substrate) having a function by the circuit mounted on the audio output substrate 70, a lamp driver substrate 35, etc., or the circuit mounted on the audio output substrate 70 and a function by the circuit mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35 The effect control command may be transmitted, and may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the effect control substrate 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through on another board, or the control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35 and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. According to the control, the microcomputer 100 executes control relating to voice control and lamp control, and further changes the received command as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. It may be sent to the Even in that case, the sound control board 100 and the lamp driver are similar to the display control according to the play control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above embodiment. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the substrate 35 or the sound / lamp substrate. In the case of such a configuration, the various types of determination made by the effect control microcomputer 100 in the embodiment described above may be similarly made to be performed by the effect control microcomputer 100, or sound output Control means such as a microcomputer mounted on the substrate 70, the lamp driver substrate 35, or the sound / lamp substrate may be used.

  (16) In the embodiment described above, when the variation is started in order to notify the microcomputer for effect control of the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the variation time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of pseudo sequence, one. Although the example of transmitting the variation pattern command has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the gaming control microcomputer is the first command before reaching reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo sequence, presence or absence of slip effect (so-called second if it does not reach) Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before stop, and the second command after reaching reach such as reach type and re-lottery effect (so-called second stop if it does not reach) Command) may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in the variable display on the basis of the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer is notified of the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer is made to select a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. It is also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending the first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. In addition, the fluctuation | variation aspect shown by each command is not necessarily limited to this example, It can change suitably also about the order to transmit. In this way, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which has to be stored as the fluctuation pattern command. As described above, in the configuration in which the variation pattern is notified to the effect control microcomputer by two commands, the determination result of the display result by the effect process at the time of winning in the second command after transmitting the first command, Alternatively, pre-reading determination information such as the variation pattern type may be transmitted, and effects of pre-reading notice may be executed based on the reception of the second command. Here, the pseudo ream is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of suspension memories are being performed continuously, although the fluctuation is originally one time corresponding to one suspension memory. It is an abbreviation showing continuous fluctuation. In addition, the term “slip” means effect display in which the symbol is slipped from the predicted stop position immediately before the stop of the symbol in the variable display.

  (17) The embodiment described above can be applied to an apparatus such as a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The program and data for realizing the embodiments described above are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided by a removable recording medium to a computer device or the like, and a storage device such as a computer device or the like in advance. It does not matter if it is distributed by pre-installing it in. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter. Also, the embodiment of the game is not limited to one that is executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but may be executed by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

  (18) Although the gaming machine for paying out the game medium to the player's hand according to the occurrence of the prize has been described as the present embodiment, the game medium is sealed, and the game medium is used for the player according to the occurrence of the prize. You may employ the enclosure type game machine which adds a game point (score), without paying out at hand. The enclosed type game machine is provided with a circulation path for circulating a plurality of balls as an example of a game medium in the game machine, and a storage unit for storing the game points is provided according to the ball lending operation. The gaming points are added to the storage unit, the gaming points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the firing operation of the ball, and the gaming points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of the winning.

  (19) In the embodiment described above, for example, the case is shown in which a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols of “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. It is not limited to the form. For example, the symbol displayed in a variable manner and the symbol displayed in a derived manner do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the symbol displayed in a variable manner may be derived and displayed. In addition, it is not necessary to change and display a plurality of types of symbols, and the change display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately repeating lighting and blinking of the one type of symbol display. And even in this case, one kind of symbol used for the variable display may be finally derived and displayed, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol is finally derived and displayed It may be one.

  (20) In the embodiment described above, the “ratio (probability, probability)” is described by taking a predetermined value exceeding 0% as a specific example. However, 0% may be used as the “proportion (proportion, probability)”. For example, in the case where "the occurrence rate of one is higher than the occurrence rate of the other" by comparing the occurrence rate of the predetermined gaming state 1 with the occurrence rate of the other gaming state 2 in the predetermined gaming period, Also includes the case where the rate of occurrence of one game state is 0%.

  (21) In the embodiment described above, after the variable display result is derived and displayed when it is determined that the display result of the variable display is a probability change big hit, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is unconditionally in a probability change state An example of controlled stochastic state control is shown. However, not limited to this, the probability change determination device is controlled to be a probability change state when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 20 A type of probability change state control may be performed.

  The present invention is not limited to the one described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

  In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the embodiment and the modifications described above, and the configurations shown in the later-described form examples and the modifications may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be understood that the above-described embodiment disclosed this time and the form described below are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

  As the gaming machine of the present invention, the game is also capable of performing variable display (variable display etc.) of identification information (symbol information, symbol etc.) and controlling the advantageous state (big hit gaming state etc.) advantageous to the player. Machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.), which is provided with variable display means (effect display device 9, effect control microcomputer 100 etc.) capable of executing variable display of identification information, and identification information (symbol information etc.) A first display that includes first information (numeric information, numbers, etc.) and second information (decoration information, characters, etc.), and displays the first information without displaying the second information in the display pattern of the identification information. A pattern (a pattern displayed by numbers, etc.) and a second display pattern (a pattern displayed by numbers and characters) displaying the first information and the second information are provided, and the variation display means Where the information is After the fluctuation in the direction (downward direction etc.) is started, the fluctuation display is executed by the first display pattern (the fluctuation display is executed by the number etc.) and the fluctuation display is stopped by the second display pattern (number and In the display mode, the first information when displayed in the first display pattern and the first information when displayed in the second display pattern). Are different (as shown in FIG. 13, when displaying only with numbers, numbers are displayed larger than when displaying with numbers and characters, etc.) and detection that can detect the player's action Means (for example, push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A, touch sensor, infrared sensor, camera, etc.) and specific display (for example, FIG. 7, small button (white) D 901, large button (white) D 902, large button (red) D 903, stick D 904, small button (white) D 901 U, large button (white) D 902 U, large button shown in FIG. (Red) D 903 U, specific display execution means (for example, button development effect processing (S 905 29), variable display effect processing (S 90 172), etc.) for performing the stick D 904 U, etc., the specific display execution means As a display, a first specific display (for example, small button (white) D901 etc.) and an advantage for the player over the first specific display (for example, a big hit expectation, a 16R probability variation big hit (see FIG. 29) The second specific display (for example, the first specific display with a small button (white) D with a high degree of expectation, which is the probability of becoming a probability variation jackpot when there is a normal big hit and a definite variation jackpot) The second specific display is a large button (white) D902, a large button (red) D903, a stick D904, etc. when the 901 is specified, and the second specific display is a large button (white) D902 when the first specified display is a large button (white) D902. If the first specific display is the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, etc., and the second specific display is the stick D904 etc. can be displayed when the first specific display is the large button (red) D903, the detection by the detection means is not effective. After the first specific display is displayed in a period (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 51 to 60), the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 54C) After the small button (white) D901 is displayed as shown in FIG. 55, the small button (white) D901 is changed to a large button (white) D902 as shown in FIG. 55 (G), and a large button (white) D90. Is changed to a large button (red) D 903 as shown in FIG. 55 (I)), and after the change in the effective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T11 to T13 shown in FIGS. An operation effect (for example, FIG. 55 (K) using the second specific display (eg, large button (red) D 903 or large button (red) D 903 U, etc. as shown in FIG. 55 (J) or FIG. 55 (K)). As shown in Fig. 55 (L), there is a gaming machine in which an effect of notifying the result as shown in Fig. 55 (L) is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the first identification information and the second identification information can be suitably displayed. Also, the rendering effect is improved.

  Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the identification information may be related to the specific display or the operation effect. For example, even if the operation presentation using the first specific display is performed and the operation presentation using the second specific display is performed, the display mode of the first information or the second information may be different. Good. According to such a configuration, the variation of the effect is increased, and attention can be given to which operation effect using the specific display is performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, a game machine capable of playing a game (pachinko game machine 901, slot can be suitably displayed as the first embodiment of the game machine capable of suitably displaying the first identification information and the second identification information and improving the rendering effect. Machine etc.), and detection means (eg, push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A, touch sensor, infrared sensor, camera etc.) capable of detecting the action of the player, and a specific display (eg, The small button (white) D901, the large button (white) D902, the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, the small button (white) D901U, the large button (white) D902U shown in FIGS. Specific display execution means (for example, button development effect processing (S 905 29)) for performing button (red) D 903 U, stick D 904 U, etc., variable table Middle effect processing (S90172) and the like, and the specific display execution means is a game than the first specific display (for example, small button (white) D901 etc.) and the first specific display as the specific display. The second specific display (for example, the second with a high degree of advantage (for example, the expectation of a big hit, a probability of becoming a 16R probability variation big hit (see FIG. 29), the probability of becoming a probability variation big hit when there is a big hit and a definite variation big hit) 1 When the small display (white) D901 is used as the specific display, the second specific display includes the large button (white) D902, the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, etc., and the first specific display as the large button (white) D902 If the second specific display is the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, etc., and the first specific display is the large button (red) D903, the second specific display is the stick D90. Etc.), and after the first specific display is displayed in the ineffective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 51 to 60), the first specific display is displayed. After changing to the second specific display (for example, after displaying the small button (white) D901 as shown in FIG. 54C), the small button (white) D901 is shown as in FIG. White) changing to D902, and further changing the large button (white) D902 to the large button (red) D903 as shown in FIG. 55 (I)), the effective period of detection by the detecting means (for example, FIG. In T11 to T13 shown in FIG. 60, the second specific display after change (for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (J) or FIG. 55 (K), large button (red) D 903 or large button (red) Motion production using D903U etc.) For example, a game machine in which an effect of prompting an operation as shown in FIG. 55 (K) and notifying a result as shown in FIG. 55 (L), etc. is executed. Below, an example of this embodiment of the gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

(Other embodiments)
Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. Note that this other embodiment may be referred to as an "embodiment". FIG. 23 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 901 according to another embodiment, showing a layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 903 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 902. In the game board 902, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed.

  In the lower part of the game area of the game board 902, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The regular winning ball device 906A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball device 906B has a pair of movable winglets that are changed to a normally open state in a vertical position and an enlarged open state in a tilting position by a solenoid 9081 for a normal motorized product shown in FIG. A tulip type character (normal motorized character) is provided, and a start area (second start area) forms a second start winning opening. When the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are not particularly distinguished from one another, they are simply referred to as "starting winning opening".

  The game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the regular winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, a first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. The game ball having passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, a second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG.

  In addition, the game ball which has passed (entered) a winning opening such as a starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) or a large winning opening (described later) is provided corresponding to each winning opening. What is detected by the switches (a first start opening switch 9022A, a second start opening switch 9022B, and a count switch 9023 (described later)) is referred to as "winning". Among the "winning", winning to the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening) is referred to as "starting winning", and in particular, winning to the first starting winning opening is referred to as first starting winning. The winning of the second starting winning opening is referred to as a second starting winning.

  While a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the occurrence of the first start winning (the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 9022A), the first special view reserve memory number (described later ) Is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”), the first special figure game executed on the first special symbol display device 904A (described later) or the decorative symbol executed on the image display device 905 (described later) A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a variable display of is established.

  A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the occurrence of the second start winning (the detection of the game ball by the second start opening switch 9022 B), and the second special view reserve memory number (described later) Is a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4") or less, a second special figure game (described later) executed on the second special symbol display device 904B or a decorative symbol executed on the image display device 905 (described later) A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a variable display of is established. Note that the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the first start winning and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the second starting win may be the same or different from each other. Good.

  The first special view reserve memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning) that are not executed immediately when the first start winning occurs and are temporarily suspended. The occurrence of the first start prize even when the first start condition for executing a variable display game such as a first special view game (described later) or a variable display of a decorative symbol is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start prize. If the first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game described above is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established earlier is being When the gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in an execution waiting state). That is, the number of first special view pending storages is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning that is in the execution waiting state. Each time the first start condition is satisfied, the number of first to-be-stored storages decreases by one.

  In addition, although the 1st starting condition by a certain 1st starting prize is satisfied, the 1st starting condition which permits the start of the variable display game by the 1st starting winning is not satisfied Variable indication corresponding to the 1st starting winning concerned Is stored (held) as hold data (first special-image hold information) until a first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the suspended first special-pattern suspension information is digested one by one each time the first start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the digested first-special-pattern suspension information is executed.

  The second special drawing reserve memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning) that are not executed immediately when the second start winning occurs and are temporarily suspended. Even if the second start condition for executing a variable display game such as a second special view game (described later) or a variable display of a decorative symbol is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start prize, the second start prize is generated If the second start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game described above is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established earlier is being When the gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in an execution waiting state). In other words, the second special drawing reserve storage number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning that is in the execution waiting state. The number of second special map reservations is decreased by one each time one second start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the 2nd start condition by a certain 2nd start winning is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd start winning concerned with which the 2nd start condition which permits the start of the variable display game by the 2nd starting winning combination is not satisfied Is stored (held) as hold data (second special-image hold information) until a second start condition for permitting the start of the variable display game by the second start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held second special-image hold information is digested one by one each time the second start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the second special-character hold information to be digested is executed.

  The number of pending storages obtained by adding the number of first special view pending storages and the number of second special view pending storages is referred to as “total pending storage number”. In the case where the first special map reservation number, the second special image reservation number, and the total reservation number are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as “the number of special image reservations” or “the number of reservation memories”. That is, when simply referred to as "the number of special map holding storage" or "the number of holding storage", one or two of the first special drawing holding storage number, the second special drawing holding storage number, and the total holding storage number Or it may refer to three. Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as "start conditions" or "execution conditions". Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as “start conditions”. In addition, the first special view hold information and the second special view hold information are also simply referred to as "special view hold information" unless they are distinguished from each other.

  In the lower part of the game area of the game board 902, a special variable winning ball device 907 is provided. The special variable winning ball device 907 forms a big winning opening that changes to a closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter) and an open state in which the game ball can pass (enter). Specifically, the special variable winning prize ball device 907 includes a special winning opening door which is opened and closed by a solenoid 9082 for a special winning opening door shown in FIG. 24, for example, and the state of the special winning opening by opening and closing the special winning opening door. Change (open, closed).

  As an example, the special variable winning prize ball device 907 closes the special winning opening door when the solenoid 9082 is in the OFF state and closes the special winning opening, and opens the special winning hole door when the solenoid 9082 is in the ON state. The big winning opening is open. The game ball which has passed (entered) the big winning opening in the open state is detected by, for example, a count switch 9023 shown in FIG. That is, by opening the special winning opening, winning to the special winning opening occurs.

  A predetermined number (for example, 12) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the occurrence of the winning on the big winning opening (detection of the game ball by the count switch 9023). The number of prize balls (for example, 12) to be paid out based on the occurrence of the prize in the big prize winning opening is the number of prize balls to be paid out (for example, 3) based on the occurrence of the first start prize, The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of (for example, three) is greater. That is, the state of the special winning opening (opened state, closed state) greatly influences whether or not the player has an advantage.

  A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 902. The first special symbol display device 904A is composed of, for example, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of 7 segments or dot matrix. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 904B. The first special symbol display device 904A variably displays (variable display) special symbols (also referred to as "special images") that are plural types of identification information (special identification information) that can identify each. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 904B. In addition, the special symbol (special figure) variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as "the first special figure" or "special figure 1", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 904B (Special figure) is also referred to as "second special figure" or "special figure 2". Also, a game to be executed with variable display of identification information (or variable display of identification information itself) is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, a variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 904A (a variable display game in which the first special view is variably displayed) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and a variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 904B. (A variable display game in which the second special view is variably displayed) is also referred to as a second special view game. Moreover, when not distinguishing the 1st special figure game and the 2nd special figure game, it is also only called a "special figure game".

  The first special symbol display device 904A (same for the second special symbol display device 904B) is a special figure game, and includes a plurality of types including numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. The special symbol is displayed variably. Each special symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to each.

  A first hold indicator 9025A and a second hold indicator 9025B are provided on the right side of the game area on the game board 902 (the top of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B) . The first hold indicator 9025A is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the number of first special view hold memories (the number of first special view game holds) based on the hold data (first special view hold information) A first pending display is made to display possible. The second hold indicator 9025B is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special view hold storage number (the number of pending for the second special view game) based on the hold data (second special view hold information) A second pending display is made to display possible.

  When the first hold display and the second hold display are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as “hold display”. Moreover, the expression "hold display" may refer to the display itself (display by LED) as well as the operation (lighting control of the LED by the first hold indicator 9025A and the second hold indicator 9025B) . For example, the pending display in the case of saying that the pending display is newly added indicates the newly added display itself. The same applies to the "hold display" in the start winning storage display area 905H (described later) and the "active display" (described later) in the active display area AHA '(described later).

  On the left side portion of the game area in the game board 902, a pass gate 9041, a normal symbol display 9020, and a general drawing reserve display 9025C are provided. The gaming ball having passed through the passing gate 9041 is detected by, for example, a gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. If the common drawing reserve memory number (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”) based on the fact that the gaming ball having passed the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021, the normal symbol display 9020 A common drawing start condition for executing a common drawing game (described later) to be executed in is established.

  The normal symbol display 9020 is constituted by LEDs of 7 segments, a dot matrix, etc. in the same manner as the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. The normal symbol display 9020 variably displays (variable display) an ordinary symbol (also referred to as “common figure” or “ordinary drawing”) which is a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. Note that a variable display game in which an ordinary symbol is variably displayed is also referred to as a common drawing game (or “normal drawing game”). In addition, the information regarding the common drawing game in which the common drawing start condition is satisfied but the common drawing start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (held) as holding data (general drawing holding information).

  The common drawing hold display 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays, for example, the common drawing hold storage number based on the held data (general drawing hold information) by the number of LEDs to be lit. The common drawing reserve memory number is the number of common drawing games whose execution is temporarily suspended without being executed immediately when the gaming ball having passed the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021. That is, the common drawing reserve memory number is the number of games of the common drawing game which is in the state of waiting for execution. The common drawing reserve storage number decreases by one each time one common drawing start condition is satisfied.

  Near the center of the game area on the game board 902, an image display device 905 is provided. The image display device 905 is formed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  In the display area of the image display device 905, decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R are arranged. In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, decorative symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each, are variably displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction (correspondence) with the special symbol game, and the finalized decorative symbol (also referred to as the final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed. . The decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 905L is also referred to as a left symbol, the decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 905C is referred to as a middle symbol, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 905R is also referred to as a right symbol. The variable display of the decorative design is also included in the variable display game.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 905, a start winning storage display area 905H is disposed. In the start winning storage display area 905H, a hold display corresponding to the hold information is performed. In the start winning combination storage display area 905H, for example, the hold display may be performed left-justified. That is, when the number of reservations for a special drawing game increases due to the establishment of a new start condition, a new reservation is made so that it is sequentially digested from the left end of the start winning storage display area 905H (closest side of the active display area AHA '). You may add a display. When the number of reservations for a special drawing game decreases due to the establishment of a new start condition, the reservation display (the display from the oldest display) displayed at the left end of the start winning game storage display area 905H is deleted. When there is another hold indication, the other hold indication (each hold indication when there are a plurality of other and hold indications) is shifted to the left.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 905, an active display area (also referred to as a current display area, an active hold display area, a display time display area, etc.) AHA 'is disposed. In the active display area, an active display (also referred to as a display at the time of digestion, a display this time, etc.) is performed based on elimination of the hold display from the start winning storage display area 905H when the start condition is satisfied. That is, the hold display displayed at the left end of the start winning storage display area 905H is shifted (shifted) to the active display area AHA 'and the active display is displayed when the start condition is satisfied. Hereinafter, the active indication displayed based on the certain pending indication M being erased may also be referred to as the active indication corresponding to the pending indication M.

  In this embodiment, the active display area AHA ′ is disposed on the left side of the start winning storage display area 905H as shown in FIG. 23, but the active display area AHA ′ is any of the display areas of the image display device 905. It should just be arrange | positioned in the position of.

  An upper tray and a lower tray are provided at predetermined positions of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area. Attached to the member forming the lower tray is, for example, a stick controller 9031A which can be held and tilted by the player at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the lower tray main body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). There is. The member forming the upper tray is, for example, a push button 9031 B which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position (for example, above the stick controller 9031 A) on the front side of the upper surface It is provided.

  A sound output member is provided in the periphery of the game area of the gaming machine frame 903. In the example shown in FIG. 23, the speakers 908UL and 908UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and the speakers 908LL and 908LR are installed at the lower left and right lower portions of the upper tray It has been installed. Hereinafter, when the speakers 908UL, 908UR, 908LL, and 908LR are not particularly distinguished from one another, they are simply referred to as the speaker 908.

  Inside and around the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 903 are provided movable movable objects (movable bodies) that operate as effects or decorations. In the example shown in FIG. 23, the first position (the initial position shown in FIG. 23) to the second position (the lower position; for example, the position of the front surface of the display area of the image display device 905) at the upper position of the image display device 905. A movable movable object 9017 is provided.

  In the inside and the periphery of the game area of the gaming machine frame 903, light emitting members (light emitters) for emitting light as effects or decorations are provided. In the example shown in FIG. 23, the light emitting member 909 CC is installed on the movable part 9017, and the light emitting member 909 CL and the light emitting member 909 CR are installed on the left and right positions of the image display device 905. A light emitting member 909 SL and a light emitting member 909 SR are installed at the left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903 U. Hereinafter, the light emitting members 909CC, 909CL, 909CR, 909U, 909SL, and 909SR are simply referred to as lamps 909, unless otherwise distinguished.

  Although the image display device 905, the speaker 908, the lamp 909, and the movable role object 9017 described above are effect devices for executing effects, the game machine 901 is, for example, a device having a vibrating portion, other effects such as a device having a blower portion A device may be provided.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, based on the fact that the normal drawing start condition is satisfied after the normal drawing start condition is satisfied, the normal drawing game by the normal symbol display device 9020 is started. In the regular game, after starting the variable display of the normal symbol (after starting the variation of the normal symbol), when the predetermined time which becomes the common drawing variation time passes, the determined normal symbol which becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol Stop display (derivative display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (common symbol per symbol) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per common symbol (per normal symbol)" It becomes ". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed symbol, for example, a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", the variable display result of the normal symbol is "general symbol lost (normal Design loss)). In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol being "per common figure", the enlargement and release control (tilting control) in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip forming the variable winning ball device 906B is tilted is performed The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the first special view game is started based on the establishment of the first start condition after the establishment of the first start condition, and the second start condition is established after the formation of the second start condition The second special drawing game is started based on the above. In the special figure game, after the start of the variable display of the special symbol (after the start of the variation of the special symbol), when the variable display time as the special figure fluctuation time passes, the finalized variable result of the special symbol is determined Derivate and display the symbol (special drawing display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" as a specific display result, and a special symbol different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol. It is a loss. In addition, if a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be a "small hit" as a predetermined display result.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to the present embodiment, as an example, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is a big hit symbol, and the special symbol indicating the symbol “-” is a lost symbol. Note that different special symbols may be used as big hit symbols in the first special figure game and the second special figure game.

  After the variable display result in the special view game becomes "big hit", the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state which is the specific gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 901 controls the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning prize ball device 907 to the open state in the big hit gaming state. The big hit game state in which the big winning opening is controlled to the open state is an example of the advantageous state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to a small hit gaming state which is a special gaming state different from the big hit gaming state.

  Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 901 determines a round (also referred to as a “round game”) advantageous to the player in the big hit gaming state after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”. Execute the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). The round is the opening cycle of the big winning opening. The pachinko gaming machine 901 changes the state (opened state, closed state) of the special winning opening by opening and closing the special winning opening door of the special variable winning prize ball device 907 in each round (each round). For example, the pachinko game machine 901 opens the big winning opening door at the start of the round, changes the big winning opening from the closed state to the open state, maintains the big winning opening in the open state, and then closes the big winning opening door. The big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state, and one round is ended. Whether a predetermined winning opening time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses after the special winning opening opens the special winning opening in the round, or a predetermined number (for example, nine) of winnings occur to the special winning opening The open state is maintained until one of the conditions is satisfied.

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 repeatedly executes the round in the big hit gaming state until the number of times of execution of the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, even if the number of round executions has reached the predetermined upper limit number, the execution of the round is performed by the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball does not win at the big winning opening). You may complete the The predetermined upper limit number of times is two types (eight times corresponding to 8R, 16 times corresponding to 16R in this embodiment), but may be one type or three or more types. May be

  In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R arranged in the display area of the image display device 905, variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the start of the special drawing game. In addition, a reach state may be reached in a period from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when the variable display is ended by stop display of the finalized decorative symbol. With the reach state, a decorative symbol (also referred to as a "reach variation symbol") that has not been stopped yet is displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 constitutes part of a big hit combination Is a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or some of the decorative symbols are fluctuated synchronously while constituting all or a part of the big hit combination. The effect in the reach state is called reach effect.

  As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the rendering pattern, the possibility that the big hit combination and the like will be finally stopped and displayed after the reach effect may be made different (also referred to as “big hit expectation” or “big hit reliability”).

  In addition, the jackpot expectation degree by a certain production is, for example, (probability that the production will be executed at the big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) / {(probability of the presentation being performed at the big hit) × (probability of the big hit) It is calculated by + (probability that the effect is executed other than the big hit time) × (probability of not becoming a big hit). In addition, when a certain effect is executed, when it always becomes a "big hit", the big hit expectation degree of the effect is "1". The same is true for the super reach expectation degree by a certain effect.

  The reach production is a production that gives notice to the player that the big hit expectation is high, etc., but suggests the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the player that the big hit expectation is high in addition to the reach production, It is possible to execute suggested effects (e.g., hold effects, pseudo linked effects, etc.). In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 can execute an effect (for example, a hold effect, a slip effect, etc.) for giving a notice to the player that any reach effect or a certain reach effect will be executed. Hereinafter, a player may be notified of an indication that any reach effect or a certain reach effect may be executed, that the jackpot expectation is high, etc.

  In addition, the notification (prediction, suggestion) by the advance presentation effect may be performed before the player recognizes whether the notification content is realized. For example, the advance notice effect notifying the possibility of reaching the reach state may be performed as long as it is performed before the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, the notice effect for notifying the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" may be performed as long as it is performed before the finalized decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Among the advance notice effects, it is sufficient that what is to be the advance read notice effect (also referred to as “pre-decision notice effect”) is included. Prior read advance notice effect determines whether the variable display result is "big hit" based on the hold information etc. of the special drawing game before starting the variable display to be the advance notice target. (Pre-reading), it is the announcement production which is executed on the basis of the decision result. In the following description, the pending information targeted for the pre-reading preview effect is referred to as pending information of the target, the pending display corresponding to the pending information of the target is referred to as pending display of the target, and the variable display corresponding to the pending information of the target It is also called variable target display. In addition, the active display (active display displayed during the variable display of a target) corresponding to the pending display of a target is also called the active display of a target.

  In addition, the display mode of the active display may be determined at the time of winning, or may be determined at the time of the pending display (before the active display is made yet), or when it is the active display (at the time of the change start) You may decide to Further, the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the active corresponding to the hold display (active display displayed by erasing the hold display) may be the same (or substantially the same), They may be related to each other. The display mode being the same (or substantially the same) means that, for example, an active display of the same or substantially the same display mode as the display mode of the hold display before the deletion is displayed.

  When the display modes are related to each other, there are, for example, three types of display modes (expected degrees of display mode a> expected degrees of display mode b> expected degrees of display mode c) as display modes of pending display. 3 types of display modes having different jackpot expectations as display modes of active display (expected degree of display mode s> expected degree of display mode t> expected degree of display mode u. However, display mode s is display mode a, display mode a, Unlike in any of b and c, the display mode t is different from any of the display modes a, b and c, and the display mode u is different from any of the display modes a, b and c). When the hold display is erased, the active display of the display mode s is displayed. When the hold display of the display mode b is erased, the active display of the display mode t is displayed. When the hold display of the display mode c is erased, the display It is that the active display of like u is displayed. In addition, when an active display effect at the time of addition described later is executed, when the pending display of the display mode a is erased, the active display of the display mode t or the display mode u is displayed, and the pending display of the display mode b is erased When it is turned on, the active display of the display mode u is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, as the pre-reading advance notice effect, the hold effect by the display mode of the hold display in the start winning game storage display area 905H can be executed. In the hold effect, for example, an effect (hold at the time of addition hold) to display a hold display to be added to the start winning memory display area 905H in a notice mode (blue or red in this embodiment) different from the normal mode (white in this embodiment) An effect (hold change effect) or the like for changing the already displayed hold display to a notice mode (including a change from one notice mode to another notice mode) is included.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is an effect to be executed when changing the hold display to the notice mode as the pre-reading preview effect, and a character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 to directly display the hold display. It is possible to execute an effect to be operated indirectly (hold action effect. It may be referred to as “hold action success effect” in distinction from “hold action failure effect” described later). In addition, an effect (hold operation failure effect) that is executed when the hold display is not changed to the advance notice mode may be executable.

  Further, in the present embodiment, active display effect by the display mode of the active display in the active display area AHA ′ may be executable as the advance effect (or the advance notice effect). In the active display effect, for example, an effect that displays the active display to be added to the active display area AHA ′ when the pending display at the time of erasing is the normal mode in the notice mode (active display effect at the time of addition) An effect (active display change effect) or the like for changing the displayed active display into a notice mode (including a change from a certain notice mode to another notice mode) is included. In the case where the on-hold change effect and the active display change effect are not particularly distinguished, they may be referred to as “on-hold change effect and the like”.

  Further, when the active display effect is executable, the hold action success effect is executed when the active display is changed to the notice mode, and a character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 to display the active display. It may be an effect to act directly or indirectly. Similarly, the pending action failure presentation may be presentation performed when the active display is not changed to the notice mode.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a concealment effect that conceals the pending display in the start winning combination memory display area 905H can be executed. Note that the concealment effect is an effect that makes it difficult to view at least a part of the hold display. For example, in the concealment effect, it is difficult to visually recognize the hold display at a position where even the number of the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 905H can not be recognized at all (for example, an image for the cover is displayed on the front (upper layer) And it looks like a silhouette on the whole and is difficult to view, an image for concealment is displayed on the front, it is partially disturbed to make it difficult to see, and the holding display itself becomes hard to see (smaller, translucent) It may be an effect that makes it difficult or not (for example, an image for concealment is displayed on the front surface and is completely invisible, completely invisible by transparency or non-display). Also, the number of pending displays displayed in the start winning memory display area 905H may be an effect that makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize the display modes of those that are somehow recognizable (for example, recognizable by a silhouette). . Moreover, although the display mode is recognizable, it may be an effect that makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize the number. For example, the presence or absence of a pending display (for example, a red pending display) of a certain display mode may be notified. Also, in the case of a hold display in which the notice mode is expressed not in the whole but in a part (for example, the upper part), the concealment effect makes it difficult to visually recognize the upper part of each hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 905H. Or it may be an effect that makes it impossible.

  Also, the concealment effect may hide the active display in the active display area AHA 'instead of or in addition to the hold display in the start winning combination memory display area 905H.

  In the present embodiment, as a determined special symbol in the special figure game, among the special symbols (special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5” and “7”) that become the big hit symbol, the special symbol indicating the number “3” When the special symbol indicating the symbol or the number of "5" is stopped and displayed, it becomes "8R probability variation big hit" which is one aspect of "big hit". Also, when the special symbol indicating the number of "7" is stopped and displayed, it becomes "16R probability variation big hit" which is one aspect of "big hit". After the end of the 16R probability variation big hit or the 8R probability variation big hit, probability variation control (probability fluctuation control) is performed together with time saving control (time shortening control).

  By performing the probability change control, the probability that the variable display result will be a "big hit" in the special figure game each time is improved to be higher than when the probability change control is not performed. The probability change control is one of the conditions when the special figure game of a predetermined number of STs (also referred to as the number of probability changes) is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state, and when the variable display result is "big hit". End when it is first established. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become "big hit" when the probability change control is being performed, the probability change control finish. The predetermined number of times of ST is, for example, 70 times.

  Further, by performing the time reduction control, the variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the case where the time reduction control is not performed. In the time-saving control, after the big hit gaming state is over, when a predetermined time-saving number of special drawing games are executed and the variable display result is a "big hit", either condition is established first. To finish. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become a "big hit" when the time-saving control is being performed, the time-saving control ends when the predetermined number of time-saving special drawing games have been consumed. Note that the predetermined time reduction number is, for example, 70 times.

  When time saving control is performed, the control for shortening the variation time of the normal symbol in the regular drawing game by the regular symbol display 9020 (general drawing variation time) is shorter than that when the time reducing control is not performed, or Control to improve the probability that the variable display result of the symbol is "per common drawing" than when time saving control is not performed, the variable display result is "per common drawing" in the normal variable winning ball device 906B based on The game ball has a second start winning game such as control to make tilt control time to perform tilt control of the movable wing piece longer than when time reduction control is not performed, and control to increase the number of tilts than when time reduction control is not performed. A control that is advantageous to the player is performed by making it easy to pass through (enter) the mouth and increasing the possibility that the second start condition is established. As described above, the control that facilitates the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening with the time saving control and is advantageous for the player is also referred to as high open control. As high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

  By performing the high open control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening is in the wide open state is increased more than when the high open control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 904B is likely to be satisfied, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the next variable display result The time until the "big hit" is reduced. The period during which the high release control can be performed is also referred to as a high release control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed.

  The gaming state in which both time saving control and high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state. In addition, the gaming state in which the probability change control is performed is also referred to as a high probability state or a probability change state. The short time state (high base state) and the high certainty state (probable state) are examples of advantageous states advantageous to the player.

  A game state in which time reduction control and high opening control are performed together with probability change control, that is, a game state in a high probability state (probability state) and also in a high base state (time reduction state) is a high probability high base state or time reduction probability state Also called. The game state in which only time change control is performed and time reduction control and high opening control are not performed, that is, the game state which is a high probability state (probability state) but not a high base state (time reduction state) is a high probability low base state It is also referred to as a timeless nondeterministic state. In addition, only the high certainty high base state (time reduction attached definite change state) may be called "probable change state". A gaming state in which time reduction control or high opening control is performed without probability change control being performed, that is, a gaming state in which the high base state (time reduction state) is not a high probability state (probability state), is also referred to as a low probability high base state Be done. The game state in which time change control is not performed and time saving control or high opening control is not performed, that is, the game state in neither high probability state (probability state) nor high base state (time reduction state) is also referred to as low probability low base state Be done. The low probability low base state is a normal state in which neither probability change control nor short time control nor high open control is performed. Therefore, the low probability low base state is distinguished from high probability high base status, high probability low base status, low probability high base status, etc. It may be called "normal state". The initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, the state after the initialization processing is performed after the power is turned on as in the case where the system reset is performed) is the normal state.

  In the present embodiment, even when the variable display result does not become a "big hit" when the probability variation control is being performed, if the special figure game of the predetermined ST number (number of probability variations) is digested. Although the probability change control is ended, the probability change control may not be ended until the variable display result becomes “big hit” without providing the ST number (number of probability changes). That is, a probability variation big hit may be provided to continue the probability variation control until the next big hit. When providing a positive variation big hit that continues the positive variation control until the next big hit, a normal big hit may not be provided after the termination.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, an audio control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. 24 are mounted. The pachinko gaming machine 901 also includes a relay substrate 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main substrate 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012. Besides, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, an interface substrate and the like are arranged on the back of the gaming board 902 etc. in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board consisting of a function for setting random numbers used in the special view game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012 or the like. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. In addition, the main board 9011 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to perform the first special figure or the second special figure. The variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 9020 or controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 by performing the on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 9020 It also has a function to control.

  The main circuit 9011 includes, for example, a microcomputer 90100 for game control, a switch circuit 90110 for capturing detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmitting the detection signals to the microcomputer 90100 for game control, and a microcomputer 90100 for game control A solenoid circuit 90111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9081 and 9082 is mounted.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and receives the image display device 905, the speaker 908, and the lamp Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the 909 and the movable part 9017 are mounted.

  The sound control board 9013 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and based on a command or control data from the effect control board 9012, causes the speaker 908 to output sound. The processing circuit etc. which perform audio signal processing are mounted. The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and based on the command and control data from the effect control board 9012, the light on / off drive in the lamp 909 etc. The lamp driver circuit etc. to be carried are mounted. The character and article control board 9016 is a control board for character and article movement control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and drives the movable character 9017 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012 and the like. A circuit or the like that outputs a drive signal is mounted on an actuator (not shown).

  As shown in FIG. 24, the main substrate 9011 is connected to a wire for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023. The gate switch 9021, the first start opening switch 9022A, the second start opening switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as one called a sensor. If it is In addition to the gate switch 9021, the first start opening switch 9022A, the second start opening switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023, the game machine 901 is another switch (for example, a glass door (not shown) similarly connected to the main substrate 9011). A switch for detecting the open / close state of the game board, a switch for detecting the open / close state of the game board 902 itself, a switch for detecting an illegal vibration, or a switch for detecting an illegal electromagnetic wave. In addition, the main substrate 9011 includes a first special symbol display device 904A, a second special symbol display device 904B, a normal symbol display 9020, a first hold indicator 9025A, a second hold indicator 9025B, and a common view hold indicator 9025C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 is relayed by the relay substrate 9015. The control command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 via the relay substrate 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 25 (A) is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 25A is an example, and another command form may be used. Further, in this example, the effect control command is configured by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the effect control command may be one or more than three. Good.

  In addition, the information which comprises each production control command may be memorize | stored in the command table in ROM90101, for example. When transmitting a certain effect control command to the effect control board 12, as a setting for transmitting the effect control command, the storage address of the effect control command in the command table is designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer It may be stored in the buffer area that has been After that, the command control process (step S9017) of the game control timer interrupt process (FIG. 33) is executed, and the effect control command set as described above is transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012. Is transmitted.

  A part of FIG. 25A will be described. For example, the command 8001H is a first change start command that specifies the start of the first special view game. The command 8002H is a second variation start command that designates the start of the second special figure game. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol variably displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of an instruction by the effect control command. In the fluctuation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the fluctuation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for notifying a variable display result. For example, as shown in FIG. 25B, the variable display result notification command determines whether the variable display result is “lost”, “16R positive variation big hit”, or “8R positive variation big hit”, or a big hit type Different EXT data are set according to the determination result of.

  The command B100H is a first starting opening prize notification command for notifying that the first starting condition is established (may also be referred to as a first starting opening prize designation command and a first starting opening winning command). Command B200H is a second starting opening prize notification command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the second special figure game by second special symbol display device 904B is established (second starting opening winning combination designated command , Sometimes referred to as the second start opening winning combination command).

  The command C1XXH is a first pending storage number notification command for reporting the first special view pending storage number. The command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for reporting the second special view pending storage number. For example, when the first start winning combination occurs (when the number of first special drawing reservations is increased), the first reservation number of prizes notification command is transmitted together with the first starting opening prize notification command. Further, when the second start winning combination occurs (when the number of the second special view pending storage increases), the second pending storage number notification command is transmitted together with the second starting opening winning notification command.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (determination result specification command at the time of winning) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. The command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating the determination result of the big hit type as a determination result of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” as the winning determination result. The command C6XXH is a variation category designation command (also referred to as a "variation category command") indicating the determination result of the variation category (also referred to as "variation pattern type") as the determination result at the time of winning. The variation category is a name when the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is classified (aggregated) according to the type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including variation patterns of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

  In the present embodiment, in the winning random number value determination process (FIG. 37), the variation category except for some cases (for example, when there is the first starting winning in the high base state etc.) when the starting winning occurs. The variation category is determined based on the random number value MR3 'for determination. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 9012 is performed. The effect control CPU 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 super-reaches the variable display based on the start winning based on the value set in the change category command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 when the start winning occurs. It can be recognized whether or not.

  The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main substrate 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing a program for game control, fixed data and the like, and a work for game control A RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 for providing an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 for executing a control operation by executing a program for game control, and an update of numerical data indicating a random number independently of the CPU 90103 A random number circuit 90104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105 are provided.

  FIG. 26 is an explanatory view exemplifying a random number value counted (updated) on the main substrate 9011 side. As shown in FIG. 26, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 9011, a random value MR1 'for determining a special display result, a random value MR2' for determining a big hit type, and a random value MR3 'for determining a variation category. The numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 'for determining the common pattern display result and the random number value MR5' for determining the variation pattern is controlled so as to be able to be counted. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of such a game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

  The random number circuit 90104 may be any one as long as it counts numerical data indicating a part or all of the random number values MR1 ′ to MR5 ′. The CPU 90103 updates various numerical value data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 90104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154 shown in FIG. 30, for example, to change the random number MR1 '. The numerical data representing a part of .about.MR5 'may be counted.

  FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a variation category and a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In FIG. 27, the variation category “PA1 ′” is a shortening / non-reach (loss) variation category. The fluctuation pattern “PA1′-1” belongs to the fluctuation category “PA1 ′”. The fluctuation category “PA2 ′” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern "PA2'-1" and "PA2'-2" belong to the fluctuation category "PA2 '". The fluctuation category “PA3 ′” is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern "PA3'-1" and "PA3'-2" belong to the fluctuation category "PA3 '". The fluctuation category “PA4 ′” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PA4′-1” to “PA4′-3” belong to the variation category “PA4 ′”. The fluctuation category “PA5 ′” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation patterns "PA5'-1" to "PA5'-3" belong to the fluctuation category "PA5 '". The variation category “PB1 ′” is a shortening / reach (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation pattern “PB1′-1” belongs to the fluctuation category “PB1 ′”. The variation category “PB3 ′” is a normal reach (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation pattern "PB3'-1" and "PB3'-2" belong to the fluctuation category "PB3 '". The fluctuation category “PB4 ′” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB4′-1” to “PB4′-3” belong to the variation category “PB4 ′”. The variation category “PB5 ′” is a super reach β (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation patterns "PB5'-1" to "PB5'-3" belong to the fluctuation category "PB5 '".

  A part of FIG. 27 will be described. For example, the variation pattern “PA3′-1” belonging to the variation category “PA3 ′” is a normal reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA3′-2” is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PA4′-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4 ′” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA4′-2” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA4′-3” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice. The variation pattern “PB3′-1” belonging to the variation category “PB3 ′” is a normal reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. In addition, the fluctuation pattern “PB3′-2” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is performed once. The variation pattern "PB1'-1" belonging to the variation category "PB1 '" is a shortened / reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shortened compared to the variation pattern "PB3'-1". The variation pattern “PB4′-1” belonging to the variation category “PB4 ′” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB4′-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4′-3” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  FIG. 28 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 90101. The display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. 28 is a random number value MR1 'for determining the special view display result before the variable display result (special view display result) of the special view game is derived and displayed. Is a table referenced to make a decision based on In the display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. 28, according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the determination values (special map display result determination) assigned to the respective special view display results ("big hit", "lost") The number of numerical values to be compared with the random number value MR1 'of. According to the display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. 28, when the gaming state is in the high certainty state, more determination values are allocated to the “big hit” than in the low certainty state. That is, in the high certainty state, the probability of being a "big hit" is made higher than in the low certainty state.

  FIG. 29 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 90131 stored in the ROM 90101. When the jackpot classification determination table 90131 shown in FIG. 29 determines that the special image display result is to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit", the jackpot classification is determined to be one of a plurality of types. It is a table referred to in order to determine based on random value MR2 '. In the big hit classification determination table 90131 shown in FIG. 29, depending on whether the variation special drawing is the first special drawing or the second special drawing (that is, whether to execute the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game) Of the number of judgment values (numeric values to be compared with the random value MR2 'for determining the jackpot type) assigned to each jackpot type ("16R probability variation jackpot", "8R probability variation jackpot") It is different. According to the big hit classification determination table 90131 shown in FIG. 29, when the variation special figure is the second special figure (when the second special figure game is executed), it is more than when the variation special figure is the first special figure A lot of judgment values are assigned to "16R probability variation big hit" (than when the first special view game is executed). That is, in the second special view game, the probability of becoming the “16R probability variation big hit” is increased when the “big hit” is obtained compared to the first special view game.

  In addition, the ROM 90101 includes a variation category determination table to be referred to in order to determine the variation category to any of a plurality of types, and a variation pattern to be referred to in order to determine a variation pattern to any of a plurality of types. A decision table is stored.

  The RAM 90102 holds various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the like. The RAM 90102 is a backup RAM in which part or all of the data to be held is backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply substrate.

  FIG. 30 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control data holding area provided in the RAM 90102. In the RAM 90102, a game control data holding area 90150 as shown in FIG. 30, for example, is provided as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the like. The game control data holding area 90150 shown in FIG. 30 includes a first special view hold storage unit 90151A, a second special view hold storage unit 90151B, a hold specification information storage unit 90151C, a common view hold storage unit 90151D, and a game. A control flag setting unit 90152, a game control timer setting unit 90153, a game control counter setting unit 90154, and a game control buffer setting unit 90155 are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 90151A stores holding data (first holding information) of the first special figure game. As an example, the first special view reserve storage unit 90151A is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the order of detection of the game balls) to the first start winning opening, and the random number is made by the CPU 90103 based on the passage (enter) of the game balls With the numerical value data (for example, the numerical value data indicating random number values MR1 'to MR3') indicating the random number value extracted from the circuit 90104 or the like as pending data, the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example "4") I remember until.

  The second special view reserve storage unit 90151B stores reserve data (second reserve information) of the second special view game. As an example, second special view reserve storage unit 90151 B is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the order of detection of gaming balls) to the second start winning opening, and random number is generated by CPU 90103 based on the passage (enter) of the gaming balls Until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4") by using as numerical data (eg, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 'to MR3') indicating random numbers extracted from the circuit 90104 etc. Remember.

  The hold specification information storage unit 90151C is a winning order of the entire hold data including the hold data stored in the first special view hold storage unit 90151A and the hold data stored in the second special view hold storage unit 90151B. Hold data (first hold information) based on the occurrence of the first start winning, or hold data based on the occurrence of the second start win (second hold information) Stores information indicating whether the In the hold specification information storage unit 90151C shown in FIG. 36, “first” indicates that the hold information is the first, and “second” indicates that the hold information is the second.

  The common drawing reservation storage unit 90151D stores holding information of the common drawing game. For example, the common drawing reserve storage unit 90151D determines the common drawing display result extracted from the random number circuit 90104 or the like by the CPU 90103 based on the passage of the gaming ball in correspondence with the holding number in the order that the gaming ball passed the passing gate 9041 Numeric data indicating a random number value MR4 'for use is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  The game control flag setting unit 90152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags capable of updating the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 90152 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The game control timer setting unit 90153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control timer setting unit 90153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 90154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used to control the progression of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, in the game control counter setting unit 90154, the first hold storage number count value, which is the storage value of the first hold storage number counter for counting the first special view hold storage number, Second pending storage number count value which is the storage value of the second pending storage number counter for counting, total pending storage number count value which is the storage value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number It is memorized.

  The game control buffer setting unit 90155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 90155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 90105 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 24 has an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 90100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the effect control board 9012 is provided with a CPU for effect control 90120 that performs control operation according to a program, a ROM 90121 for storing a program for effect control, fixed data, etc., and a work area for the CPU 90120 for effect control. RAM 90122, a display control unit 90123 for executing processing for determining control contents of display operation in the image display device 905, etc., and a random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently for the effect control CPU 90120. A circuit 90124, an I / O 90125, and an RTC (real time clock) circuit 90126 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 90120, the ROM 90121, and the RAM 90122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 9012.

  A wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating a rendering image to the image display device 905, and a information signal (rendering sound signal) indicating a command to the audio control substrate 9013 are transmitted to the rendering control substrate 9012. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (electric decoration signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 9014, and the like are connected. Furthermore, in the effect control board 9012, a wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 9035A an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation on the stick controller 9031A has been detected, or a game for the push button 9031B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that a user's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 9035B is also connected.

  In the effect control board 9012, numerical data representing various random number values used to control the effect operation is countably updated, for example, by the random number circuit 90124 or the like. The random number used to control such a rendering operation is also referred to as a rendering random number.

  The ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 24 stores various data used to control the rendering operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 90121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 90120 for effect control to make various determinations, determinations and settings.

  The ROM 90121 also includes a plurality of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 90120 to control the effect operation of various effect devices (for example, the image display device 905, the speaker 908, the lamp 909, the movable object 9017, etc.) Data to be configured is stored. Each effect control pattern is composed of data indicating control contents of various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. That is, various rendering operations are realized by setting a rendering control pattern. For example, the variable display operation of the decorative symbol corresponding to each fluctuation pattern is realized by setting the effect control pattern corresponding to each fluctuation pattern. The hold control, the active display effect, the fanfare effect, the effect during the round game (the effect during opening and the effect during closing), the ending effect and the like are also realized by setting the effect control pattern corresponding to each effect.

  FIG. 31A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is, for example, control for controlling various effect operations such as effect control process timer determination value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, movable combination control data, end code, etc. It may be configured from data, and the contents of various effect control, switching timing of effect control, and the like may be set in time series. In addition to the above, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data for specifying the content of operation control in a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value (effect control process timer value) of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM built in the effect control microcomputer. That is, determination values corresponding to the execution time (rendering time) of each rendering operation are set in advance. Note that, instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command has been received from the main substrate 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling an effect operation in the effect control microcomputer. Data indicating the switching timing or the like of effect control may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes, for example, data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 905, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data for specifying the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 905. The voice control data includes, for example, data indicating a voice output mode from the speaker 908, such as data indicating an output mode such as a rendering sound interlocked with the variable display operation of the decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the voice control data is data designating a voice output operation from the speaker 908. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating a light emission operation mode of the lamp 909. That is, the lamp control data is data for specifying the light emitting operation of the lamp 909. The operation detection control data includes, for example, a period in which an operation on the operation unit such as the push button 9031 B is effectively detected, and data indicating the control content of the rendering operation in the case where the operation is effectively detected. That is, the operation detection control data is data for specifying a rendering operation according to the operation on the operation unit. The movable part control data includes, for example, data indicating an operation mode of the movable part 9017. That is, the movable part control data is data for specifying the operation of the movable part 9017. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all of the effect control patterns, but are effect control patterns configured to include a part of control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 31 (B) is a diagram for explaining various effect operations performed in accordance with the content of the effect control pattern. The effect control CPU 90120 determines control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative symbol is displayed in a mode specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination values, and the character Control for displaying an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the image display device 905 is performed. Further, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 908 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 909 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data, and an operation specified by the operation detection control data An operation to the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B is received in a valid period (which may be simply referred to as a valid period) to perform control to determine the contents of the effect. In addition, dummy data (data for which control is not specified) may be set as data corresponding to a rendering device that is not to be controlled even though it corresponds to the rendering control process timer determination value.

  Although the rendering operation shown in FIG. 31 (B) corresponds to the entire period from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the final stop, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed. An effect control pattern may be provided to execute the effect operation in response to a partial period (e.g., a period in which the advance effect is performed). Alternatively, to perform the rendering operation in accordance with a predetermined period other than during variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the big hit gaming state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state, etc.) An effect control pattern of may be provided.

  When setting the effect control pattern, pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read out from the ROM 90121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 or pattern data of the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern The storage address in the ROM 90121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 90121 may be designated. After that, every time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not any of the effect control process timer determination values match, and if it matches, the effect operation according to the corresponding various control data Control the As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 follows the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern, and the effect device (for example, the image display device 905, the speaker 908, and the lamp). 909, advance the control of the movable part 9017 and the like). In each of the process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n associated with the effect control process timer determination values # 1 to #n, voice control data # 1 to voice control Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n, movable combination control data # 1 to movable combination control data #n are respectively effects The control content of the rendering operation in the device is shown, and rendering control execution data # 1 to rendering control execution data #n for specifying the execution of rendering control are configured.

  The instruction according to the effect control pattern set in this manner is output from the effect control CPU 90120 to the display control unit 90123, the sound control board 9013, the lamp control board 9014, the feature control board 9016 and the like. For example, in the display control unit 90123 that has received an instruction from the effect control CPU 90120, a predetermined VDP, for example, reads out the image data indicated by the instruction from the image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily stores it in VRAM. Let Further, in the voice control board 9013 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 90120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and expands it by temporarily storing it in voice RAM or the like .

  FIG. 32A is a block diagram and the like showing an example configuration of the effect control data holding area provided in the RAM 90122. In the RAM 90122, as an area for holding various data used to control the rendering operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a presentation control data holding area 90190 as shown in FIG. 32A is provided. The effect control data holding area 90190 shown in FIG. 32A includes an effect control flag setting unit 90191, an effect control timer setting unit 90192, an effect control counter setting unit 90193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 90194. There is.

  For example, the effect control flag setting unit 90191 can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 905, the effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 9011, etc. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 90191 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The effect control timer setting unit 90192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of effect images on the screen of the image display device 905, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 90192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 90193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 90193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 90194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 90194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the start winning combination reception command buffer 90194A as shown in FIG. 32B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 90194. In the start winning combination reception command buffer 90194A, storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “8”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “8”) of the total pending storage number are provided. When there is a start winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (the first starting opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command), the symbol specifying command, the variation category command The four commands of the pending storage number notification command (the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command) are set as one, and transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012. A storage area is secured in the start winning combination reception command buffer 90194A so that the start opening winning combination designation command, the symbol specification command, the variation category command, and the pending storage number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 90120 stores the commands from the top of the free area of the start winning reception command buffer 90194A in the order received at the start winning. At the start winning game, command transmission is performed in the order of a start opening winning combination designation command, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, and a pending storage number notification command. Therefore, if command reception is properly performed, as shown in FIG. 32B, in the storage area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “1” to “8”, the start opening winning combination designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation The category command and the pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. The command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 90194A shown in FIG. 32B is the first storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1” each time variable display of a decorative symbol is started. Are deleted from the ones stored in, and subsequent storage contents are shifted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data constituting the prefetched advance notice buffer 90194 B as shown in FIG. 32C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. Storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “8”) corresponding to respective data constituting the start winning combination reception command buffer 90194A are provided in the prefetch notice buffer 90194B. That is, in the prefetch notice buffer 90194 B, the contents of the determination regarding the prefetch notice effect relating to the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 90120 etc. are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “8”. . For example, when pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in start prize winning reception command buffer 90194A due to start of variable display of decorative design, etc. The content associated with the buffer number is also deleted. In addition, when the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is shifted to another buffer number in the start-up winning reception command buffer 90194A due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the read preview buffer 90194B, the contents associated with the buffer number are also shifted to the other buffer numbers.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the present embodiment will be described.

  On the main substrate 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process to be a game control main process. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 90103 sets the interrupt prohibition and then performs necessary initialization. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 90102 is cleared. Further, the register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is performed. As a result, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When initialization is complete, after enabling the interrupt, it enters loop processing. In the game control main process, the loop process may be performed after the process for restoring the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop is performed.

  When the CPU 90103 which has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 90103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 33 is started, the CPU 90103 first executes a predetermined switch process to make the gate switch 9021, the first start opening switch 9022A, and the second start opening through the switch circuit 90110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 9022B and the count switch 9023 is determined (step S9011). Subsequently, by performing predetermined main-side error processing (including sensor error notification processing), abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9012).

  Subsequent to the processing of step S9012, the CPU 90103 executes predetermined information output processing to, for example, the jackpot information, start information, probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901 And other data are output (step S9013).

  Following the information output process of step S9013, the CPU 90103 executes a game random number update process (step S9014). In the gaming random number updating process of step S 9014, for example, at least a part of gaming random numbers (for example, random number values MR 1 ′ to MR 5 ′ and the like) used on the main substrate 9011 side is updated by software. As one example, the CPU 90103 may use software to update numerical data indicating game random numbers counted by the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 90154.

  Following the game random number updating process of step S9014, the CPU 90103 executes a special symbol process process (step S9015). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special drawing process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 904B, opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 907, and the like in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process processing, the CPU 90103 executes the normal symbol process processing (step S9016). The normal symbol process processing is executed to control the display operation (for example, lighting and extinguishing of segment LED, etc.) in the normal symbol display 9020, and the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 906B. Enables tilting operation setting and so on.

  Following the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 90103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main substrate 9011 to a sub-side control substrate such as the effect control substrate 9012 (step S9017). As an example, in the command control process, among the output ports included in I / O 90105, corresponding to the settings in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in game control buffer setting unit 90155, effect control After setting control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the substrate 9012, predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By setting the switch to the off state, transmission of effect control commands based on settings in the command transmission table is enabled. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is ended after setting to the interrupt enabled state.

  FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process process executed in step S9015 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the special symbol process processing, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101). FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S90101 of the special symbol process process (step S9015) shown in FIG.

  In the start winning determination process (step S90101) shown in FIG. 35, the CPU 90103 first detects the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 9022A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A. Based on the determination, it is determined whether the first start port switch 9022A is on (step S90201). If it is determined in step S90201 that the first starting opening switch 9022A is on (step S90201; YES), the CPU 90103 determines that the first special view reservation storage number (the first special view game suspension number) is predetermined. It is determined whether the upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) has been reached (step S90202). The CPU 90103 may identify the first special-image storage number by reading the first-storage number count value which is the storage value of the first-storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154, for example.

  If it is determined in step S90202 that the first special map storage number is not the upper limit value (step S90202; NO), the CPU 90103 stores the starting opening buffer storage value provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155 (starting value "1" is set to the mouth buffer value) (step S90207). Following the process of step S90207, the CPU 90103 executes a start winning process (FIG. 36) (step S90208), and sets (clears) "0" to the start hole buffer value (step S90209).

  If it is determined in step S90201 that the first start port switch 9022A is not on (step S90201 (NO)), or if it is determined in step S90202 that the number of first special view storage locations has reached the upper limit (Step S90202 (YES)) After executing the processing of step S90209, the CPU 90103 receives a command from the second starting opening switch 9022B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B. It is determined based on the detection signal whether or not the second start port switch 9022B is on (step S90203). If it is determined in step S90203 that the second start port switch 9022B is on (step S90203; YES), the CPU 90103 determines that the second special view reserve storage number (the number of reserve for the second special view game) is predetermined. It is determined whether the upper limit value (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) has been reached (step S90204). The CPU 90103 may specify the second special-image storage number by reading the second-storage number count, which is the storage value of the second-storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154, for example.

  If it is determined in step S90204 that the second special figure storage number is not the upper limit value (step S90204; NO), the CPU 90103 stores the starting opening buffer stored value provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155 (starting value "2" is set to the mouth buffer value) (step S90210). Following the processing of step S90210, the CPU 90103 executes start winning processing (FIG. 36) (step S90211), sets (clears) "0" to the starting opening buffer value (step S90212), and determines start winning processing Finish.

  When it is determined in step S90203 that the second start port switch 9022B is not on (step S90203 (NO)), or when it is determined in step S90204 that the number of second special view storage locations has reached the upper limit value. (Step S90204 (YES)), the processing of steps S90210, S90211 and S90212 is not performed, and the start winning determination processing is ended.

  According to the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 35, even if the first start opening switch 9022A and the second start opening switch 9022B simultaneously detect the start winning of the game ball, the processing based on the respective detections Can be completed.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning process (steps S90208 and S90211). In the start winning process shown in FIG. 36, the CPU 90103 first updates the number of to-be-saved special-character storages according to the starting opening buffer value so as to add 1 (step S90215). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the first pending storage number count value is incremented by one, while when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, the second pending storage number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by one when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by one when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. Following the process of step S90215, the total number of pending storages is updated so as to add one (step S90216). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the storage value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154, may be updated so as to add one.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90216, the CPU 90103 determines a special figure display result determination random value MR1 ', a big hit type among the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 90104 and the game control counter setting unit 90154. The numerical value data indicating the random number value MR2 'for random number and the random number value MR3' for variable category determination are extracted (step S90217). Numeric data representing each random number value extracted in this manner is stored at the head of the empty entry in the special view storage section 90151 according to the starting opening buffer value by being set as storage information (step S90218). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating random number values MR1 ′ to MR3 ′ is set in the first special image storage section 90151A, while the starting port buffer value is “2”. At the same time, numerical data representing random number values MR1 'to MR3' is set in second special image storage section 90151B. In addition, information according to the starting opening buffer value is stored in the hold specification information storage unit 90151C.

  Following the process of step S90218, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting a starting opening winning notice command according to the starting opening buffer value to the effect control board 9012 (step S90219). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning notification command is performed. When the starting opening buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the second starting opening winning notification command is performed. The start-up winning combination notification command set in step S90219 is mainly executed by executing the command control process (step S9017) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 33, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. The signal is transmitted from the substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90219, the CPU 90103 executes a winning-time random number value determination process (step S90220). Thereafter, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting the pending storage number notification command (step S90221). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the setting for transmitting the first pending storage number notification command is performed. When the starting opening buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the second holding storage number notification command is performed. Then, the start winning process ends. In addition, for example, the command control process (step S9017) of the timer control process for game control shown in FIG. 33 is executed after the special symbol process process is finished, for example, the pending storage number notification command set in step S90221 is executed. The main substrate 9011 transmits the effect control substrate 9012.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart etc. which show an example of random number value determination processing at the time of a prize (step S90220). In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 37A, the CPU 90103 first specifies the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (step S90401). In the process of step S90401, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the big hit gaming state is confirmed by checking the state of the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 or the like. Specifically, the CPU 90103 identifies the big hit gaming state when the big hit flag is on, and identifies the big hit gaming state when the big hit flag is not on (when it is off). Further, in the process of step S90401, the CPU 90103 identifies the high base state or the low base state by confirming the state of the high base flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 or the like. Specifically, the CPU 90103 identifies the high base state when the high base flag is in the on state, and identifies the low base state when the high base flag is not in the on state (when in the off state). . Also, in the process of step S90401, the CPU 90103 identifies the high probability state or the low probability state by confirming the state of the high probability flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 or the like. Good. Specifically, the CPU 90103 identifies the high probability state when the high probability flag is on, and identifies the low probability state when the high probability flag is not on (when it is off). May be

  Note that the CPU 90103 sets the high base flag in the on state in the big hit end process (step S90117). The CPU 90103 also clears the high base flag to the off state in the special symbol stop process (step S90113). For example, the CPU 90103 sets an initial value of zero to the fluctuation number counter to be compared with the number of time reductions in the big hit end processing, and updates (counts up) the value of the fluctuation number counter if it becomes lost in special symbol stop processing. At the same time, the high base flag is cleared to the off state when the value of the fluctuation number counter reaches the number of time savings. The CPU 90103 also sets the high probability flag to the on state in the big hit end process. In addition, the CPU 90103 clears the high probability flag to the off state in the special symbol stop process. For example, the CPU 90103 sets an initial value of zero to the fluctuation number counter to be compared with the ST count in the big hit end processing, and updates (counts up) the value of the fluctuation number counter when it becomes lost in the special symbol stop processing. At the same time, when the value of the fluctuation number counter reaches the high probability number, the high probability flag is cleared to the off state. The value of the fluctuation number counter is stored, for example, in the game control counter setting unit 90154.

  Following the process of step S90401, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not a big hit gaming state is currently in progress (step S90402). That is, it is determined whether or not it is specified in the process of step S90401 that the jackpot gaming state. If it is determined in step S90402 that the player is not in the big hit gaming state (step S90402; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether it is in the high base state (step S90403). In other words, it is determined whether or not the high base state is identified in the process of step S90401.

  If it is determined in step S90402 that a big hit gaming state is determined (step S90402; YES), or if it is determined in step S90403 that a high base state is found (step S90403; YES), the CPU 90103 indicates the starting opening buffer value. Is "2" (step S90404). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the second start winning combination (the start winning combination where the variation special figure is the second special figure). When it is determined in step S90404 that the starting opening buffer value is not "2" (step S90404; NO), the winning random number value determination process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S90403 that the high base state is not set (step S90403 (NO)) or if it is determined in step S90404 that the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step S90404 (YES)), The CPU 90103 sets (selects) the special view display result determination table according to the current gaming state (step S90405). Specifically, when the CPU 90103 is not in the high certainty state, table data for the low certainty state (when the value in the range of “8000” to “8329” is “big hit” is displayed from the display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. The table data assigned to the special view display result is set, and when it is in the high probability state, the table data for the high probability state (“8000” to “8818” is displayed from the display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. The table data assigned to the special view display result whose range value is “big hit” is set In addition, when the high probability flag is in the on state, the CPU 90103 identifies the high probability state and the high probability flag If it is not in the on state (when it is in the off state), it may be specified as the low certainty state, and the first special figure and the second special figure are different. When the display result determination table (first special view display result determination table, second special view display result determination table) is used, the first special view display result determination table is displayed when the starting opening buffer value is “1”. If it is used and the start port buffer value is "2", the second special view display result determination table may be used.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90405, the CPU 90103 has numerical data representing the random number value MR1 'for determining the special display display result extracted in step S90217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S90406). For example, the CPU 90103 shows numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 'and individual determination values assigned to the "big hit" special figure display result in the special figure display result determination table data set in step S90405. The comparison is performed to determine the presence or absence of a determination value that matches the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 '. Alternatively, CPU 90103 is the minimum value of the judgment value assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the special figure display result determination table data set in step S90405 and the numerical data indicating random number value MR1 ′ (lower limit The value) may be compared with the maximum value (upper limit value) to determine whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 'is within the range between the minimum value and the maximum value of the determination value.

  If it is determined in step S90406 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S90406; YES), the random number value MR2 'for jackpot type determination extracted in step S90217 of the start winning processing shown in FIG. Based on the numerical data shown, it is determined the jackpot type (step S90407). Specifically, first, CPU 90103 responds to the fluctuation special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified by the starting opening buffer value. Set (select) the big hit classification decision table. Specifically, the CPU 90103 sets table data corresponding to the fluctuation special figure from the big hit type determination table 90131 shown in FIG. Subsequently, the CPU 90103, for example, compares the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 'for determining the jackpot type with the judgment value of each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table data set according to the variation special chart etc. Then, the jackpot type matching the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 'may be determined.

  Following the process of step S90407, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting a symbol designation command according to the determination result of the process of step S90407 to the effect control board 9012 (step S90408). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S90406 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S90406; NO), setting for transmitting the symbol designation command according to the loss to the effect control board 9012 is performed (step S90409). In addition, the symbol designation command set in step S90409 is mainly executed by executing the command control process (step S9017) of the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 33 after the special symbol process process is finished, for example. The signal is transmitted from the substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012.

  After executing the process of step S90408 or the process of step S90409, the CPU 90103 determines whether the high base state is set (step S90410). If it is determined in step S90410 that the high base state is not set (step S90410; NO), that is, if the scene 1 or the scene 3 described above, the CPU 90103 is for the low base state according to the special view display result. A variation category determination table is set (selected) (step S90411). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S90410 that the high base state is present (step S90410; YES), that is, if the scene 2 or the scene 4 is present, the CPU 90103 selects the high base state according to the special view display result. Set (select) a variation category determination table for (step S90412).

  FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of selection of the variation category determination table. FIG. 38A shows a selection example of selecting any of the variation category determination tables from among the plurality of variation category determination tables when in the low base state. According to FIG. 38 (A), when the special figure display result is "loss" in the low base state, three types of variation category determination tables ("C-TBL1" and "C" in the figure are shown according to the number of pending storages). One of the variation category determination tables is selected from-TBL2 and "C-TBL3". Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38A, when the number of pending storages is 0 or 1, the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” is selected, and when the number of pending storages is 2 or 3 When the variation category determination table "C-TBL2" is selected, and the number of pending storages is four or more, the variation category determination table "C-TBL3" is selected. Also, according to FIG. 38 (A), when the special figure display result is "big hit" in the low base state, one type of variation category determination table ("C-TBL4" in the figure, regardless of the number of pending storages). Is selected.

  FIG. 38B is a selection example of selecting any of the variation category determination tables from among a plurality of variation category determination tables when in the high base state. According to FIG. 38 (B), when the special view display result is "loss" in the high base state, two types of variation category determination tables ("C-TBL1" and "C" in the figure are shown according to the number of pending storages). One of the variation category determination tables is selected from -TBL3 "). Further, according to FIG. 38 (B), when the special figure display result is set as the "big hit" in the high base state, one type of variation category determination table ("C-TBL5" in the figure, regardless of the number of pending storages). Is selected.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the variation category determination table. FIG. 39A shows a variation category determination table “C-TBL1” shown in FIG. 38A or 38B. Change category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 39 (A) (“C-TBL2” in FIG. 39 (B), change category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 39 (C), FIG. 39 The same applies to the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” of (D) and the variation category determination table “C-TBL5” of FIG. 39 (E)) to be compared with the random value MR3 ′ for variation category determination. Values) are assigned to multiple types of variation categories.

  For example, in the setting example of the change category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 39A, 0 out of 100 (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the determined values of the random value MR3 ′ Are assigned to the variation category "PA1 '", 70 (values in the range of "0" to "69") are assigned to the variation category "PA2'", and 27 (in the range of "70" to "96" Value) is assigned to the variation category "PA3 '", two (values in the range of "97" to "98") are assigned to the variation category "PA4'", and one (value "99") is the variation category It is assigned to "PA5 '". That is, in the setting example of the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 39A, the fluctuation category “PA1 ′” is 0% (0 ÷ 100) and the fluctuation category “PA2 ′” is 70% (70 × 100). ), The fluctuation category "PA3 '" is 27% (27 ÷ 100), the fluctuation category "PA4'" is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the fluctuation category "PA5 '" is 1% (1 ÷ 100). Be done.

  Change category determination table “C-TBL2” shown in FIG. 39 (B), change category determination table “C-TBL3” shown in FIG. 39 (C), change category determination table “C” shown in FIG. 39 (D) The same applies to the variation category determination table "C-TBL5" shown in FIG.

  It returns to FIG. 37 (A). In the process of step S90411 executed when it is determined that the high base state is not set in step S90410, the CPU 90103 determines that the special view display result is "big hit" in step S90406, the variation category determination table The table data making up "C-TBL4" is set, and it is determined that the special map display result is "lost", the variation category determination table "C-TBL1" to the variation category determination according to the number of pending storages The table data constituting one of the tables "C-TBL3" is set. Also, in the process of step S90412 executed when it is determined in step S90410 that it is in the high base state, the CPU 90103 changes the category if it is determined in step S90406 that the special view display result is "big hit". The table data constituting the determination table "C-TBL5" is set, and it is determined that the special map display result is "loss", the variation category determination table "C-TBL1" or the variation according to the number of pending storages Table data constituting one of the category determination tables "C-TBL3" is set.

  After executing the process of step S90411 or the process of step S90412, the CPU 90103 determines (determines) a variation category based on numerical data indicating a random value MR3 'for determining a variation category (step S90413). Specifically, CPU 90103 sets numerical data indicating random number value MR3 'for change category determination extracted in step S90217 of the start winning processing shown in FIG. 36 and the change set in step S90411 or step S90412. It is only necessary to determine which of the determination values matches the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 'by comparing the determination values assigned to the respective variation categories in the table data of the category determination table. Following the process of step S90413, the CPU 90103 transmits one of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 37B to the effect control board 9012 according to the determination result (determination result) by the process of step S90413. After setting for setting (step S90414), the winning random number value determination process is ended.

  Subsequent to the start winning determination process (step S90101), the CPU 90103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S90110 to S90117 according to the value of the special view process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 (See Figure 34).

  The special symbol normal processing in step S90110 is processing to be executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0". The special symbol normal processing includes processing of determining (predetermining) whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be “big hit” before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display result is determined in advance, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "1".

  The variation pattern setting process of step S90111 is a process that is executed when the value of the special process process flag is "1". The fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining a fluctuation pattern, a setting process for transmitting a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, a first fluctuation start command (or a second fluctuation start command), and the like. There is. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "2".

  The special symbol variation process of step S90112 is a process executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". The special symbol variation process is a process of causing the special symbol to be varied (variable display) in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and an elapsed time after the start of variation is a special figure variation time (FIG. 27) It includes the process of determining whether or not it has reached. In the special symbol variation processing, when the elapsed time after the start of variation reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stopping process in step S90113 is a process that is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In the special symbol stop process, the variation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and the process of stopping (deriving) the confirmed special symbol is displayed or the big hit flag is turned off. A process for transitioning the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 as a process to be executed in the case where the game is executed (when it is determined in advance that the variable display result in the special symbol normal process (step S90110) is "miss") As a process to be executed when is in the on state (if the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" in advance, it includes a setting process etc. for sending a hit start designation command (fanfare command) . In the special symbol stop process, when the big hit flag is off, the value of the special process process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and when the big hit flag is on, the special process process flag Update the value of to "4".

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S90114 is processing to be executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing is a process that performs setting for opening the big winning opening (for example, setting of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the big winning opening door for opening the big winning opening, etc.) , And a setting process for transmitting a special winning opening open notification command and the like. In the big hit opening pre-processing, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit open processing in step S90115 is a processing that is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is large based on whether the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening has passed a predetermined time or whether the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 9023 has reached a predetermined number, etc. A process of determining the timing for returning the winning opening from the open state to the closing state, and setting for closing the big winning opening (for example, for the solenoid 9082 for the winning opening door for closing the big winning opening It includes a process of setting a solenoid drive signal and the like, a setting process of transmitting a notification command and the like after opening the special winning opening, and the like. In the big hit open processing, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "6".

  The big hit opening post process of step S90116 is a process executed when the value of the special process process flag is “6”. The big hit opening post-processing is processing to determine whether or not the number of executions of the round with the big winning opening opened has reached the maximum winning opening opening number of times, or when the maximum winning opening opening number maximum value has not been reached The process to be executed includes a setting process for transmitting a special winning opening open notification command, and a setting process for transmitting a hit ending designation command as a process to be executed when the special winning opening opening frequency reaches the maximum value. It is. In the big hit opening post processing, when the number of rounds execution has not reached the maximum winning opening opening number maximum value, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and when reaching the maximum winning opening opening number maximum value Update the value of the special drawing process flag to "7".

  The big hit end process of step S90117 is a process executed when the value of the special process process flag is "7". The big hit end process is a process of determining whether or not the big hit end production waiting time (waiting time corresponding to the execution period of the ending production) has elapsed, or a process to be executed when the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed It includes a process of setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to a high probability high base state, a process of setting the number of times of ST, and the number of times of time saving. In the big hit end process, when the waiting time corresponding to the execution period of ending effect has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value.

  In the big hit open process (step S90115), the big hit open post process (step S90116), the big hit open pre process (step S90114), the big hit end process (step S90117), when the count switch 9023 is turned on, the big win The transmission setting for transmitting a mouth winning notice command is included.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing (step S90110). In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 40, the CPU 90103 first determines whether the total number of pending storages is "0" (step S90230). For example, in the process of step S90230, the total suspension storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 90154 may be read, and it may be determined whether the read value is "0".

  When the total number of pending storages is other than “0” in step S 90230 (step S 90230; NO), it is determined whether the pending data to be digested first (the pending data winning first) is the second pending information. It determines (step S90231). For example, in the process of step S90231, whether or not the information stored corresponding to the hold number “1” in the hold specific information storage unit 90151C is information indicating that it is the second hold information. It may be determined.

  When the hold data to be first digested in step S90231 is the second hold information (step S90231; YES), the hold stored in the second special view hold storage unit 90151B corresponding to the hold number "1". As data, a random number value MR1 'for determining the special view display result and a random number value MR2' for determining the big hit type are read out (step S90232). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S90232, for example, the second special storage storage count is updated by subtracting 1 by subtracting the second storage storage count value by one, and the second special storage storage is updated. Holding data indicating random number values MR1 ′ to MR3 ′ stored in entries lower than the holding number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to holding numbers “2” to “4”) in part 90151B is one entry at a time (Step S90233). Further, in the process of step S90233, the information stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” in the hold specification information storage unit 90151C is shifted upward by one entry. In addition, in the process of step S90233, the game control counter setting unit 90154 updates the total suspension storage count count value stored in the total suspension storage count counter to be decremented by one. Following the process of step S90233, the variation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variation special figure designation buffer is updated to "2" (step S90234).

  When the suspension data to be first digested in step S90231 is not the second suspension information (step S90231; NO), the suspension data stored corresponding to the suspension number "1" in the first special map suspension storage unit 90151A Then, the special figure display result determination random number value MR1 'and the big hit type random number value MR2' are read out (step S90236). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90236, the first TOC pending memory number is updated to be decremented by 1, for example, by subtracting and updating the first pending memory number count value, etc. Holding data indicating random number values MR1 ′ to MR3 ′ stored in entries lower than the holding number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to holding numbers “2” to “4”) in part 90151A is one entry at a time (Step S90237). Further, in the process of step S90237, the information stored in the entry lower than the pending number "1" in the pending specific information storage unit 90151C is shifted upward by one entry. Further, in the process of step S90237, the game control counter setting unit 90154 updates the total suspension storage count count value stored in the total suspension storage count counter to be decremented by one. Following the process of step S90237, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S90238).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S90234 and S90238, the CPU 90103 sets (selects) a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (step S90239). For example, the CPU 90103 may set the special view display result determination table, as in step S90405 of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220) shown in FIG. Subsequently, the CPU 90103 executes the special drawing based on the numerical data indicating the special drawing display result determination random number value MR1 'stored in the random number buffer for variation and the special drawing display result determination table set in step S90239. The display result is determined (step S90240). In the process of step S90240, the CPU 90103 sets the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 'and the value set in step S90239 as in step S90406 of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220) shown in FIG. The special chart display result (“big hit” or “miss”) is made by comparing each determination value individually assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the special chart display result determination table data. What should I decide?

  Following the process of step S90240, the CPU 90103 determines whether the special-image display result determined in step S90240 is a "big hit" (step S90241). If it is determined in step S90241 that the game is a "big hit" (step S90241; YES), the CPU 90103 sets the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 to the on state (step S90242). The big hit flag is cleared (reset) to the off state in the big hit end process of step S90117. Following the process of step S90242, the CPU 90103 executes a big hit type determination process (S90244). The big hit type determination process of step S90244 is the same as the big hit type determination process executed in step S90407 of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220) shown in FIG. Following the jackpot type determination process of step S90244, the CPU 90103 is, for example, a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155 corresponding to the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process of step S90244. A big hit type buffer value is set (step S90245). That is, it stores what the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process of step S 90244 is. As an example, the CPU 90103 sets "1" in the big hit type buffer value if the big hit type determined in the big hit type determination process of step S90244 is "16R positive variation big hit", and if "8R positive variation big hit", the big hit type Set "2" to the buffer value.

  If it is determined in step S90241 that "big hit" is not made (step S90241 (NO)) or after the process of step S90245 is executed, the CPU 90103 displays the special figure display result determined in the process of step S90240, or In the case of a big hit, a determined special symbol is set corresponding to the big hit type determined in the process of step S90244 (step S90248). After setting the finalized special symbol in step S90248, the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S90249), and the special symbol normal processing is ended. .

  When the total number of pending storages is "0" at step S90230 (step S90230; YES), the demonstration display setting (step S90250) is executed, and the special symbol normal processing is ended. In the demonstration display setting of step S90250, for example, a customer waiting demonstration specification command for specifying a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image or the like on the image display device 905 is from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 It is determined whether or not it has been sent. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demonstration display setting is ended.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a variation pattern determination table referred to in the variation pattern setting process (step S90111). In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 90103 determines a variation category as in the process of step S90413 of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220) shown in FIG. 37A, and a variation pattern corresponding to the determined variation category. A determination table is selected (set), and a variation pattern is determined using the selected variation pattern determination table. For example, when the CPU 90103 determines the fluctuation category “PA2 ′”, the CPU 90103 selects the fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the fluctuation category “PA2 ′” shown in FIG. When the numerical data indicating MR5 'is in the range of "0" to "39", the variation pattern "PA2'-1" is determined, and when it is in the range of "40" to "99", the variation pattern "PA2'-" Decide 2 ". Further, for example, when the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation category “PA3 ′”, the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the fluctuation category “PA3 ′” shown in FIG. When the numerical data representing the numerical value MR5 'is in the range of "0" to "79", the fluctuation pattern "PA3'-1" is determined, and when it is in the range of "80" to "99", the fluctuation pattern "PA3' -2 "is determined. The same applies to the case where other variation categories are determined.

  According to FIG. 27, FIG. 28, FIG. 38, FIG. 39 and FIG. 41 etc., the relationship between the normal reach and the super hit's expected level of super reach is super reach β> super reach α> normal reach. Also, in the normal reach, the probability of big hit is higher in the case with the pseudo-series fluctuation than in the case without the pseudo-series fluctuation. In Super Reach α (as well as Super Reach β), the probability of big hit is higher in the case with pseudo-stationary fluctuation than in the case without pseudo-stationary fluctuation, and when the number of pseudo-stations is two, it is one Expectations are higher than in the case.

  The random number value MR5 'for determining the variation pattern may be extracted at the time of execution of the process, or in the start winning process (steps S90208 and S90211) as in the case of the random number value MR3' for variation category determination. It may be extracted in step S90217 and used as reserve data, and may be read out in step S90232 (or step S90236) of the special symbol processing (step S90110).

  In the present embodiment, the set value of the number of STs (the number of definite variations) and the set value of the number of time reductions of 70 are the same value (both 70 times). The number of times may be different from the setting value of 70 times. Further, in the present embodiment, the set value of the number of STs (number of probability variations) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the set value of the number of STs (number of probability variation) in the 16R probability variation big hit are the same value However, the setting value of the number of ST (number of probability variations) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit may be different from the set value of the number of ST (number of probability variation) in 16R probability variation big hit. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting value of the number of time reductions in the case of the 8R probability variation big hit and the setting value of the time reduction number in the case of the 16R probability variation bigness are made the same value (both 70 times). The set value of the number of time savings may be different from the set value of the number of times reduced for the 16R probability variation big hit.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process. In the effect control board 9012, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute an effect control main process as shown in FIG. 42.

  In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 42, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S9071), clears the RAM 90122, sets various initial values, and installs it on the effect control board 9012. Performs register settings and the like for the CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is in the on state (step S9072). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the register setting of CTC. If it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is not in the on state (step S9072; NO), the process of step S9072 is repeatedly performed and the process waits.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 9012, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 9011 occurs separately from the timer interrupt. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 9011 is turned on. If an interrupt occurs because the effect control INT signal is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets the interrupt disable state, but an interrupt occurs when using a CPU that does not automatically cause the interrupt disable state. It is desirable to issue a prohibited instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, among the input ports included in I / O 90125, control to be an effect control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from main substrate 9011 via relay substrate 9015. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command fetched at this time is stored, for example, in a effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 90194. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt permission and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  When it is determined in step S9072 that the timer interrupt flag is in the on state (step S9072; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 clears the timer interrupt flag to be in the off state (step S9073), The command analysis processing is executed (step S9074). In the command analysis process executed in step S9074, for example, the various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main substrate 9011 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read and then read. Settings, control, and the like corresponding to the output control command issued are performed.

  Following the command analysis process of step S9074, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an error notification process (step S9075). In the error notification processing in step S 9075, for example, an error notification corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification designation command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 is performed for an act of causing the game ball to be illegally guided to the winning opening using a magnet.

  Following the error notification process of step S 9075, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an effect control process process (step S 9076). In the effect control process of step S 9076, various effect devices (for example, the image display device 905, the speaker 908, the lamp 909, the movable role object 9017, etc.) are used based on the effect control command etc. transmitted from the main substrate 9011. Judgment, determination, setting, and the like related to the rendering operation are performed.

  Following the effect control process of step S9076, the effect control CPU 90120 executes effect random number updating process (step S9077). In the effect random number updating process of step S9077, for example, at least a part of effect random numbers used on the side of the effect control board 9012 is updated by software. As one example, the effect control CPU 90120 may use software to update numerical data indicating effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 90193. Thereafter, the process returns to the process of step S9072.

  Note that, on the side of the effect control board 9012, the interrupt for receiving the effect control command and the like from the main board 9011 has been described as an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. However, the method of generating an interrupt for receiving the effect control command or the like is not limited to the above. For example, an interrupt for receiving a rendering control command or the like may be generated in response to an interrupt request by the first bit of serial communication.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart of an example of the command analysis process (step S9074). In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 43, the effect control CPU 90120 first receives the command from the main board 9011 transmitted via the relay board 9015 by confirming the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer or the like. It is determined whether or not there is (step S90501). If it is determined that there is no reception command (step S90501; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 ends the command analysis process.

  If it is determined in step S90501 that there is a reception command (step S90501; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the reception command is the first starting opening winning notice command (step S90502). . The effect control CPU 90120 may check, for example, MODE data of the received command, and specify the type of the received command (see FIG. 25).

  If it is determined in step S90502 that the command is the first starting opening winning notice command (step S90502; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 sets a first hold storage number notification waiting time (step S90503). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 may set an initial timer value predetermined as the reception waiting time of the first hold storage number notification command in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 90192.

  If it is determined in step S90502 that the received command is not the first starting opening winning notification command (step S90502; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the received command is the second starting opening winning notification command. Step S90504. If it is determined in step S90504 that the command is the second starting opening winning notification command (step S90504; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 sets a second pending storage number notification waiting time (step S90505). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 may set, in the command reception control timer, a timer initial value predetermined as a reception waiting time of the second hold storage number notification command.

  If it is determined in step S90504 that the received command is not the second starting opening winning notification command (step S90504; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the received command is a symbol designation command (step S90506). ). If it is determined in step S90506 that the received command is not a symbol designation command (step S90506; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the received command is a variation category command (step S90507). If it is determined in step S90507 that the received command is not a change category command (step S90507; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the received command is the first pending storage count notification command (step S90508). ). If it is determined in step S90508 that the command is the first pending storage number notification command (step S90508; YES), the first pending storage number notification waiting time, for example, by initializing the clock operation by the command reception control timer. Is cleared (step S90509).

  If it is determined in step S90508 that the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command (step S90508; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the reception command is the second pending storage number notification command. (Step S90510). If it is determined in step S90510 that the command is the second pending storage number notification command (step S90510; YES), the second pending storage number notification waiting time, for example, by initializing the clock operation by the command reception control timer. Is cleared (step S90511).

  When it is determined in step S90506 that it is a symbol designation command (step S90506 (YES)), or when it is determined in step S90507 that it is a variation category command (step S90507 (YES)), step S90503, step S90505, After executing any of the processes of steps S90509 and S90511, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the received command at the top of the free space in the start winning reception command buffer 90194A (step S90512). Following the process of step S90512, the process returns to the process of step S90501.

  If it is determined in step S90510 that the reception command is not the second hold storage number notification command (step S90510; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the reception command is a fluctuation pattern specification command. (Step S90513). When it is determined that it is a fluctuation pattern designation command (step S90513; YES), the CPU for effect control 90201 stores the fluctuation pattern designation command in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90515). . Following the process of step S90515, the process returns to the process of step S90501.

  If it is determined in step S90513 that the received command is not a fluctuation pattern designation command (step S90513; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 performs setting or the like according to other respective received commands (step S90518). For example, when the reception command is a gaming state designation command, the effect control CPU 90120 may analyze the gaming state designation command to specify the current gaming state. Following the process of step S90518, the process returns to the process of step S90501.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S 9076). In the effect control process shown in FIG. 44, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes an effect determination process at the time of winning (step S90150). In the prize effect determination process, the effect control CPU 90120 checks the contents stored in the start winning reception command buffer 90194A, and determines whether the start opening prize notification command is received as a reception command or A process of determining various effects is executed.

  Following the effect determination process for winning (step S90150), the effect control CPU 90120 selects one of the processes in steps S90170 to 90177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 90191 or the like. And run.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” which is the initial value. The variable display start waiting process displays an image based on whether or not the first variation start command (or the second variation start command), the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main substrate 9011 are received. It includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative design in the device 905. In the variable display start waiting process, when it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol is to be started (that is, when the fluctuation pattern designation command or the like is received), the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "1".

  The variable display start setting process of step S 90171 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. The variable display start setting process is a setting for performing variable display of the decorative symbol in the image display device 905 corresponding to variable display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B (for example, , Setting for performing display operation such as holding display, active display, etc. (for example, processing of performing effect control pattern corresponding to fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation time), setting of value of fluctuation time timer, etc.) And the like, etc. are included. In the variable display start setting process, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

  The variable display effect process of step S90172 is a process performed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". During the variable display effect processing, whether or not the variable time timer set in the variable display start setting processing (step S90171) has timed out (the elapsed time after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 905 special figure fluctuation time Processing to determine whether or not In the variable display effect process, when the fluctuation time timer times out, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The process for waiting for a special drawing in step S90173 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3." Special processing per wait processing is the processing to be executed when the finalized decoration symbol is "missing" When the variation gaming state setting process to set the gaming state of the pachinko machine 901, or when the finalized ornament symbol is "big hit" The processing to be performed includes processing for performing setting for performing fanfare production (for example, setting of a production control pattern corresponding to the fanfare production, etc.). In the waiting process per special drawing, when the finalized decoration symbol is "loss", the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and when the finalized ornament pattern is "big hit", Update the value to "4".

  The big hit start process of step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". The jackpot start process is a process of determining whether or not the big winning opening open notification command has been received, or a process being executed when the large winning opening open notification command is received, an effect being released (special variable winning in each round It includes a process for setting (for example, setting of an effect control pattern corresponding to an effect being released, etc.) for performing an effect to be performed when the ball device 907 is in the open state. In the big hit start process, when the big winning opening open notification command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”.

  The process in round of step S90175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". Processing during the round is processing to determine whether or not the notification command after the big winning a prize opening has been received, and the processing being executed when the notification command after the big winning a prize opening is received is closed effect (special variable winning in each round It includes a process for setting (for example, setting of an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect being closed) for performing an effect to be performed when the ball device 907 is in the closed state. In the process during the round, when the notification command after the opening of the special winning opening is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6”.

  The post-round process in step S90176 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". The round post-processing performs processing during open processing as processing to determine whether or not the special winning opening open notification command or hit termination designation command has been received, or processing to be executed when the special winning opening opening notification command is received. Processing for performing setting (for example, setting of a production control pattern corresponding to an effect during opening) or setting for performing ending effect as processing to be executed when a hit end designation command is received (for example, for ending effect) It includes the process of setting the value of the corresponding effect control pattern, the value of the ending effect execution time timer, and the like. In the round post process, when the special winning opening open notification command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5", and when the hit end designation command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "7" Do.

  The jackpot end post-processing in step S90177 is processing executed when the value of the rendering process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end post-processing, whether the ending effect execution time timer set in the round post-processing (step S90176) has timed out (whether the elapsed time after starting the execution of the ending effect in the image display device 5 has reached the set time And the like are included. In the big hit end post processing, when the ending effect execution time timer times out, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process (S90150) at the time of winning. In the prize effect determination process shown in FIG. 45, the effect control CPU 90120 first checks the memory content in the start winning reception command buffer 90194A (step S90151), and uses the first starting opening winning combination designation command as a new reception command. Is determined (step S90152). When it is determined in step S90152 that the first starting opening winning combination designation command has not been received (step S90152; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 receives the second starting opening winning combination designation command as a new reception command. It is determined whether or not there is (step S90154). If it is determined in step S90154 that the second starting opening winning combination designation command has not been received (step S90154; NO), the effect determination process at the time of winning is ended.

  If it is determined in step S90152 that the first starting opening winning combination designation command has been received (step S90152; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 refers to, for example, the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 90191. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a short time state (high probability high base state) (step S90155). If it is determined that the time saving state is not set (step S90155: NO), the effect control CPU 90120 executes a holding effect determination process (step S90160). In the holding effect determination process of step S90160 (the same as the holding effect determining process of step S90163), a process for determining a hold effect, an active display effect, an action effect (hold action failure effect, hold action failure effect etc), etc. include. Details will be described later.

  After executing the hold presentation determination process (step S90160), the effect control CPU 90120 stores the determination content of the hold presentation determination process (step S90161). Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the contents of the process of determining the holding effect etc. in association with the buffer number of the prefetch notice buffer 90194B corresponding to the buffer number of the start winning in the start winning receive command buffer 90194A. Remember.

  After executing the processing of step S90161, the effect control CPU 90120 adds a new hold display to the start winning storage display area 905H based on the determination content stored in step S90161 (step S90162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the start control memory display area 905H to display an on-hold display according to the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the above-described advance notice buffer 90194B. It is determined in the holding effect etc. determination process by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern to the VDP of the display control unit 90123 etc. The hold display displayed in the display mode at the time of the addition is added to the start prize storage display area 905H. Then, the effect determination process at the time of winning is finished.

  When it is determined in step S90154 that the second starting opening winning combination designation command is received (step S90154; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 refers to, for example, the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 90191. Then, it is determined whether or not it is in the time saving state (high probability high base state) (step S90156). If it is determined that the time saving state (high probability high base state) is determined (step S90156: YES), the effect control CPU 90120 executes a holding effect determination process (step S90163). The holding effect etc. determination process of step S90163 is the same as the holding effect etc. determination process of step S90160.

  After executing the on-hold effect determination process (step S90163), the effect control CPU 90120 executes the processes of step S90163, step S90164, and step S90165, and ends the effect determination process at the time of winning. The processes of steps S90163, S90164, and S90165 are similar to the processes of processes of steps S90160, S90161, and S90162, respectively.

  If it is determined in step S90155 that it is in the time saving state (step S90155: YES), or if it is determined in step S90156 that it is not in the time saving state (step S90156: NO) (S90166). Specifically, similar to the case where it is determined that the hold effect is not performed in the hold effect determination process (steps S90160 and S90163), the effect control CPU 90120 displays the normal display mode (at the time of addition and after each shift) For example, information indicating white) is stored, and a hold display displayed in a normal display manner is added to the start winning storage display area 905H. Then, the effect determination process at the time of winning is finished.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process (S90171). In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 46, the effect control CPU 90120 first reads, for example, the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 so that the special view display result is “ It is determined whether it is "" (step S90522).

  When it is determined in step S90522 that the special view display result is "loss" (step S90522; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the combination of the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that constitutes the lost combination (the final stop symbol) Step S90524). As an example, the effect control CPU 90120 is a random number value updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193 (for example, a random number value for left fixed symbol determination, a random number value for right fixed symbol determination, Numeric data representing a random number value for final symbol determination) is extracted, and a predetermined symbol determination table (for example, a left final symbol determination table, a right final symbol determination table, a central final symbol decision table, etc.) stored beforehand in the ROM 90121 etc. By referring to etc., a decorative symbol to be finally displayed in a stopped state in each of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R is determined as a combination of finalized decorative symbols constituting a lost combination.

  When it is determined in step S90522 that the special view display result is not "losing" (step S90522; NO), that is, when the special view display result is "big hit (16R positive variation big hit, 8R positive variation big hit)", for effect control The CPU 90120 determines the combination of the finalized decorative symbols constituting the big hit combination (step S90528). As one example, the effect control CPU 90120 extracts numerical data indicating a random value (for example, a random value for determining a big hit determination) updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193, and the ROM 90121 Etc. by referring to a predetermined symbol determination table (for example, a big hit determination symbol determination table etc.) stored in advance as a combination of the decoration design symbols constituting the big hit combination, the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R Decide on the decoration pattern that will be finally displayed stop. In addition, depending on which type of big hit type (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit) is, and the presence or absence of the promotion effect, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the combination of the finalized decoration symbols that make up the big hit combination Good.

  After executing either the process of step S90524 or the process of step S90528, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a button development effect determination process (step S90529). The button development effect determination process includes a process of determining whether or not a button development effect (described later) is performed, and a process of determining a presentation mode of the button development effect when it is determined to execute the button development effect. Details of the button development effect determination process will be described later.

  After executing the process of step S90529, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the reserve digest process (step S90530). Specifically, when the hold display displayed at the left end of the start winning storage display area 905H is moved (shifted) to the active display area AHA 'and there is another hold display in the start winning storage display area 905H, Move to the left about

  After executing the holding and digesting process of step S90530, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an effect control pattern set process (step S90532). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation as a usage pattern. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 as the usage pattern. Also, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the button development effect determined in the button development effect determination process of step S90529 as a use pattern. That is, when it is determined that the button development effect is to be executed in the button development effect determination process of step S90529, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the effect mode (for example, button development effect pattern to be described later) etc. In the process of step S90532, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect mode or the like of the button expansion effect determined in the button expansion effect determination process of step S90529 is set as a use pattern. Thereby, in the variable display effect process (S90172), the display operation in the display area of the image display device 905 is performed according to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command and the determination contents of the button development effect determination process (S90532) (See, for example, FIGS. 52 to 60).

  After executing the process of step S90532, the CPU 90120 for effect control sets an initial value of the effect control process timer of the process data of the effect control pattern set in step S90532 (step S90534), and starts the effect control process timer ( Step S90535) Control of the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 905 in accordance with the contents of the process data (step S90536). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, in the fluctuation time timer, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time (special pattern fluctuation time shown in FIG. 27) specified by the fluctuation pattern command (step S90537).

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 90120 digests the command stored in the start winning combination reception command buffer 90194 A (step S 90538). Specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 deletes the command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the start winning winning reception command buffer 90194A, and deletes it. The commands stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the command are shifted while maintaining the winning order. Further, in the process of step S90538, deletion or shift of information stored in the prefetch notice buffer 90194B provided in the RAM 90122 or the like is also performed according to command deletion or shift. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the variable display effect process (step S90539), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

  Hereinafter, the button development effect will be described in detail. The button development effect is an effect of changing (developing) an image (a button image imitating the push button 9031 B, a stick controller image imitating the stick controller 9031 A) corresponding to the button etc. (push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A) . Hereinafter, an image corresponding to a button or the like may be referred to as a “button or the like image” or a “button or the like display”.

  The effect control CPU 90120 changes the display mode of an image such as a button of one type (for example, changes the display mode (display color, display size) of a button image), or the button of one type as button development effect. The image is changed to an image of another type of button (eg, a button image is changed to a stick controller image).

  In the following description, a small sized white button image imitating the push button 9031 B may be referred to as a “small button (white)” or a “first mode” as an image such as a button. In addition, a large sized white button image imitating the push button 9031 B may be referred to as a “large button (white)” or a “second aspect”. In addition, a large-sized red button image imitating the push button 9031 B may be referred to as a “large button (red)” or a “third aspect”. Further, a stick controller image imitating the stick controller 9031A may be referred to as a "stick" or a "fourth aspect".

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a button development effect category and a button development effect pattern in the present embodiment. The button development presentation pattern indicates a presentation mode (display mode) of the button development presentation. The button development presentation category is a name when the button development presentation patterns are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the button development presentation category is a group name of each group including one or more button development presentation patterns categorized into common groups.

  In FIG. 47, “initial” is an initial display. "Final" is the final display. The “timing 1” is a first timing at which an image such as a button can change. The “timing 2” is a second timing at which an image such as a button can change. The “timing 3” is a third timing at which an image such as a button can change. Note that “timing 1”, “timing 2”, and “timing 3” may be different according to the variation pattern.

  Further, in FIG. 47 (also in the other drawings), “no change” indicates that there is no change in the image such as a button. "Weak change" indicates that there is a one-step change (one-step change) of an image such as a button. Specifically, "weak change (first → second)" is a one-step change from "first mode" to "second mode", that is, "small button (white)" to "large button (white)" Indicates that there is a change to The "weak change (second → third)" is a one-step change from the "second mode" to the "third mode", that is, the change from "large button (white)" to "large button (red)" It indicates that there is. "Weak change (third → fourth)" indicates that there is a one-step change from "third mode" to "fourth mode", that is, a change from "large button (red)" to "stick" ing. The "intermediate change" indicates that there is a two-step change (two-step change) of an image such as a button. Specifically, the "middle change (first to third)" is a two-step change from the "first mode" to the "third mode", that is, "small button (white)" to "large button (red)" Indicates that there is a change to "Medium change (second → fourth)" indicates that there is a two-step change from "second mode" to "fourth mode", that is, a change from "large button (white)" to "stick" ing. The "strong change" indicates that there is a three-step change (three-step change) of an image such as a button. Specifically, “strong change (first to fourth)” is a three-step change from “first mode” to “fourth mode”, that is, change from “small button (white)” to “stick” Indicates that there is a

  In FIG. 47, the button development effect category “BH1” has the “final” as the “first mode (small button (small button ( "White))", is a button development effect category. The button development presentation pattern "BH1-1" belongs to the button development presentation category "BH1".

  In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH1-1", the button etc. image does not change at any of timing 1, timing 2 and timing 3. Therefore, the button etc. image by the button development performance pattern "BH1-1" is In both the first period (“initial”, ie, before “timing 1”) and the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”) and the third period (“timing 2” to “timing 3”) A period of 4 (“final”, that is, “after timing 3”) is also the “first mode (small button (white))”.

  The button development effect category "BH2" is a button in which an image such as a button weakly changes at any one of three timings and "final" becomes "second mode (large button (white))". It is a development presentation category. The button development effect category "BH2" includes a button development effect pattern "BH2-1" having a weak change at timing 1, a button development effect pattern "BH2-2" having a weak change at timing 2, and a timing change that is weak at timing 3. There is a button development effect pattern "BH2-3" that has a change.

  For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH2-1", the button etc. image weakly changes at timing 1 and does not change at timing 2 or timing 3. Therefore, the button etc. image by the button development performance pattern "BH2-1" is In the first period (before “timing 1”), the “first aspect (small button (white))”, and the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”) or the third period (“timing”) In the second period (timing 3) and the fourth period (after timing 3), the second mode (large button (white)) is displayed.

  The button development effect category "BH3a" is a button in which an image such as a button weakly changes at any two timings out of three timings and "final" becomes "third mode (large button (red))". It is a development presentation category. In this embodiment, a button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" having a weak change at timing 1 and timing 3 and a button development effect pattern having a weak change at timing 2 and timing 3 in the button development effect category "BH3a" "BH3a-2" belongs.

  For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1," the button etc. image weakly changes at timing 1 and timing 3 and does not change at timing 2, so the button etc. image by the button development performance pattern "BH3a-1" is In the first period (before “timing 1”), the “first aspect (small button (white))”, and the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”) or the third period (“timing”) In 2 "to" timing 3 ", the" second mode (large button (white)) "is selected, and in the fourth period (" timing 3 "and thereafter), the" third mode (large button (red)) "is performed.

  The button development effect category "BH3b" is a button in which an image such as a button changes in middle at any one of three timings and "final" becomes "third mode (large button (red))". It is a development presentation category. The button development effect category "BH3b" includes a button development effect pattern "BH3b-1" having a middle change at timing 1, a button development effect pattern "BH3b-2" having a middle change at timing 2, and a middle at timing 3 There is a button development effect pattern "BH3b-3" that has a change.

  For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH3b-1", since the image of the button etc. changes in the middle at timing 1 and does not change at timing 2 or timing 3, the image of the button etc. by the button development effect pattern "BH3b-1" is In the first period (before “timing 1”), the “first aspect (small button (white))”, and the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”) or the third period (“timing”) In the second period to “timing 3” and the fourth period (after “timing 3”), “third mode (large button (red))” is displayed.

  In the button development effect category "BH4a", the image of the button etc. changes in the middle in any of the two timings of the three timings, and the image of the button etc. weakly changes in the later timing. This is a button development effect category that is the "fourth aspect (stick)". In this embodiment, the button development effect category "BH4a" has a middle change at timing 1 and a weak change at timing 3 with the button development effect pattern "BH4a-1" and a middle change at timing 2 and a weak change at timing 3 There is a button development effect pattern "BH4a-2" that belongs to.

  For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH4a-1," the button etc. image changes in the middle at timing 1, weakly changes at timing 3 and does not change at timing 2, so the button development effect pattern "BH4a-1" The button etc. image becomes the “first mode (small button (white))” in the first period (before “timing 1”), and the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”) or the third period In the period ("timing 2" to "timing 3"), the "third mode (large button (red))" is selected, and in the fourth period ("timing 3" or later), the "fourth mode (stick)" is performed.

  In the button development effect category "BH4b", the image of the button etc. weakly changes at earlier timings at any two timings of the three timings, the image of the button etc. changes middle at later timings, and the "final" is This is a button development effect category that is the "fourth aspect (stick)". In this embodiment, the button development effect category “BH4b” has a weak change at timing 1 and a middle change at timing 3 and a button development effect pattern “BH4b-1”, a weak change at timing 2 and a middle change at timing 3 There is a button development effect pattern "BH4b-2" that belongs to.

  For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH4b-1," the button etc. image weakly changes at timing 1, changes in middle at timing 3 and does not change at timing 2, so the button development effect pattern "BH4a-1" The button etc. image becomes the “first mode (small button (white))” in the first period (before “timing 1”), and the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”) or the third period In the period ("timing 2" to "timing 3"), the "second mode (large button (white))" is selected, and in the fourth period ("timing 3" or later), the "fourth mode (stick)" is performed.

  In the button development effect category "BH4c", the image of a button or the like strongly changes at any one of three timings (timing 3 in the present embodiment), and "final" is the "fourth aspect (stick) This is a button development presentation category. In the present embodiment, the button development effect pattern “BH4c-1” having a strong change at timing 3 belongs to the button development effect category “BH4c”.

  In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH4c-1," the image of the button etc. changes strongly at timing 3 and does not change at timing 1 or timing 2. Therefore, the image of the button etc. by the button development effect pattern "BH4a-1" is In the period 1 (before “timing 1”), the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”), and the third period (“timing 2” to “timing 3”) (White)) ”, and the“ fourth aspect (stick) ”in the fourth period (after“ timing 3 ”).

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of button development effect determination processing (S90529). FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of the button development effect and the like. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of the button development effect pattern. In FIG. 49A (as well as in the other drawings), the variation pattern "PA4'-X" is the variation pattern of the super reach α (loss) (specifically, the variation pattern "PA4'-1" " PA4'-2 "or" PA4'-3 ". The fluctuation pattern "PA5'-X" is a fluctuation pattern of super reach β (loss) (specifically, any of fluctuation patterns "PA5'-1", "PA5'-2" and "PA5'-3") is there. The variation pattern "PB4'-X" is a variation pattern of super reach α (big hit) (specifically, one of variation patterns "PB4'-1", "PB4'-2", and "PB4'-3"). is there. The fluctuation pattern "PB5'-X" is a fluctuation pattern of super reach β (big hit) (specifically, any of fluctuation patterns "PB5'-1", "PB5'-2", "PB5'-3") is there.

  In the button development effect determination process shown in FIG. 48, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines the presence or absence of execution of the button development effect (S90550). Specifically, based on the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the button development effect at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 49A. .

  For example, when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern “PA4′-X”, the effect control CPU 90120 determines to execute the button development effect at a rate of 5%. For example, the ROM 90121 refers to a button development effect execution presence / absence determination table for super reach α (loss), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern “PA4′-X”. The table stores numeric values to be compared with random numbers for button development effect execution presence / absence determination (for example, random number values updated in the effect random number update process (S9077)), “No execution” and “No execution”. It should be allocated at a ratio of 5:95 to “present”.

  Further, for example, when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern “PA 5 ′ ′-X”, the effect control CPU 90120 determines to execute the button development effect at a rate of 10%. For example, the ROM 90121 refers to a button development effect execution presence / absence determination table for super reach β (loss), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern “PA5′-X”. A numerical value to be stored and to be compared with the random value for determining whether or not to execute the button development effect execution may be allocated to the table at a ratio of 10:90 between “without execution” and “with execution”.

  In the effect control CPU 90120, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern of the super reach ("PA4'-X", "PA5'-X", "PB4'-X", "PB5 ' Whenever the variation pattern ("PA1'-X", "PA2'-X", "PA3'-X", "PB1'-X", "PB3'-X") is other than "-X") Decide not to execute the rendition.

  According to FIG. 49 (A), when the button development rendition is executed, since it is always a super reach, the case where the button development rendition is executed is higher than the case where the button development rendition is not executed.

  Further, when in the low certainty state, the jackpot expectation when the button development effect is performed in the super reach α is (probability of being “performed in“ PB 4 ′ −X ”) × (low certainty state” Probability of becoming “PB4′-X” at a certain time) / {(probability of being “performed” with “PB4′-X”) × (probability of becoming “PB4′-X” when in low probability state) It is about 18.5%, which is obtained from + (probability of being "executed" in "PA4'-X") x (probability of being "PA4'-X" in the low probability state)}. Note that the probability of being "execution" in "PB4'-X" is 15%, and the probability of being "execution" in "PA4'-X" is 5% (Fig. 49A). Also, since the jackpot probability in the low probability state is about 1/199 (see FIG. 28), the probability of becoming “PB 4′-X” in the low probability state is (1/199) × (30/100) The probability of becoming "PA4'-X" in the low probability state is (198/199) .times. (2/100) (see FIG. 38, FIG. 39). On the other hand, when the super reach α is executed in the low probability state, the probability of becoming a big hit is “PB 4′−X” in the low probability state. It is about 7%, which is obtained from the probability of becoming "PB4'-X" + the probability of becoming "PA4'-X" when in the low probability state. From the above, when the button development effect is performed in the super reach α, the big hit expectation is higher than in the case where it is not performed.

  Also, when in the low certainty state, the jackpot expectation when the button development effect is performed in the super reach β is (probability of being “performed in“ PB5′-X ”) × (low certainty state) Probability of becoming “PB5′-X” at a certain time) / {(probability of being “performed” with “PB5′-X”) × (probability of becoming “PB5′-X” when in low probability state) It is about 50%, which is obtained from + (probability of being "performed" with "PA5'-X") x (probability of being "PA5'-X" when in low probability state) ". Note that the probability of being "executed" in "PB5'-X" is 40%, and the probability of being "implemented" in "PA5'-X" is 10% (FIG. 49A). Also, since the jackpot probability in the low probability state is about 1/199 (see FIG. 28), the probability of becoming “PB5′-X” in the low probability state is (1/199) × (50/100) The probability of becoming "PA5'-X" in the low probability state is (198/199) .times. (1/100) (see FIG. 38, FIG. 39). On the other hand, when the super reach β is executed in the low certainty state, the probability of becoming a hit in the low certainty state is “PB5′−X” probability / (the low certainty state) It is about 20%, which is obtained from the probability of becoming "PB5'-X" + the probability of becoming "PA5'-X" in the low probability state. From the above, when the button development effect is performed in the super reach β, the jackpot expectation is higher than in the case where the button development effect is not performed.

  Return to FIG. After executing the process of step S90550, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the button development effect in the process of step S90550 (S90551). If it is determined that the button development effect is not to be executed (step S90551; NO), the button development effect determination process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the button development effect is to be executed (step S90551; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the button development effect category (S90552). Specifically, based on the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the button development effect category at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 49 (B).

  For example, when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern “PA4′-X”, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the button development effect category “BH1” at a rate of 30%, and the button development effect The category "BH2" is determined at a ratio of 20%, the button development presentation category "BH3a" is determined at a ratio of 20%, the button development presentation category "BH3b" is determined at a ratio of 10%, and the button development presentation category " "BH4a" is determined at a rate of 10%, button development effect category "BH4b" is determined at a rate of 10%, and button development effect category "BH4c" is determined at a rate of 0%. For example, the ROM 90121 stores a button development effect category determination table for super reach α (loss), which is referred to when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA4′-X”. In the table, numerical values to be compared with random numbers for button development effect category determination (for example, random number values updated in effect random number update processing (S9077)) are “BH1” and “BH2”. It may be allocated to "BH3a", "BH3b", "BH4a", "BH4b" and "BH4c" at a ratio of 30: 20: 20: 10: 10: 10: 0.

  For example, when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA5 '-X", the effect control CPU 90120 determines the button development effect category "BH1" at a rate of 0%, and the button development The presentation category "BH2" is determined at a ratio of 30%, the button development presentation category "BH3a" is determined at a ratio of 20%, the button development presentation category "BH3b" is determined at a ratio of 20%, and the button development presentation category "BH4a" is determined at a rate of 15%, button development effect category "BH4b" is determined at a rate of 10%, and button development effect category "BH4c" is determined at a rate of 5%. For example, the ROM 90121 stores a button development effect category determination table for super reach β (lost) which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA5'-X". In the table, numerical values to be compared with random values for determining the button development effect category are “BH1”, “BH2”, “BH3a”, “BH3b”, “BH4a”, “BH4b”, and “BH4c”. It should be assigned at a rate of 0: 30: 20: 20: 15: 10: 5.

  According to FIG. 49 (B), in the super reach α, the determination ratio of the button development effect category “BH4a” or “BH4b” to the determination ratio of the button development effect category “BH1” or “BH2” has a variation pattern “PB4”. The case of '-X' is higher than the case of the variation pattern 'PA4'-X'. That is, in the super reach α, the first mode (small button (white)) or the second mode (large button (white)) in the case where the image such as the button finally changes to the fourth mode (stick). Big hit expectation degree is higher than the case of staying in. Also, in the super reach β, when the determination ratio of the button development presentation category "BH4a" or "BH4b" or "BH4c" to the determination ratio of the button development presentation category "BH2" is the variation pattern "PB5'-X" Is higher than the variation pattern "PA5'-X". That is, in the super reach β, when the image such as a button finally changes to the fourth mode (stick), the jackpot expectation is higher than when the second mode (large button (white)) stops. In addition, although the relation of the big hit expectation was explained as super reach β> super reach α, according to FIG. 49 (B), the case of becoming super reach β is more than the case of becoming super reach α according to FIG. The image of the button or the like is likely to change to the fourth mode finally. From the above, the jackpot expectation of the fourth embodiment (stick)> jackpot expectation of the third embodiment (large button (red))> jackpot expectation of the second embodiment (large button (red))> first embodiment (small button) (White)) It is a big hit expectation degree of.

  Further, according to FIG. 49 (B), the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH3b" to the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH3a" is a variation pattern in the case of the variation pattern "PB4'-X". It is higher than the case of "PA4'-X", and higher in the case of the variation pattern "PB5'-X" than in the case of the variation pattern "PA5'-X". That is, when "final" becomes "third mode" by one middle change (two-step change) (BH3b), "last" is "third" by two weak changes (one-step change) Big hit expectation is higher than (BH3a) in the case of “embodiment”.

  Further, according to FIG. 49 (B), the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH4c" to the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH4a" or "BH4b" is the case where the variation pattern "PB5'-X" is It is higher than the case where it is a fluctuation pattern "PA5'-X". That is, in the case where the “final” becomes the “fourth mode” by one strong change (three-step change) (BH 4 c), one weak change (one-step change) and one moderate change (2 The jackpot expectation is higher than the case (BH4a, BH4b) in which “final” becomes “fourth mode” due to the step change). Further, when the determination pattern of the button development effect category "BH4b" to the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH4a" is the change pattern "PA4'-X" in the case of the change pattern "PB4'-X" The variation pattern "PB5'-X" is higher than the variation pattern "PA5'-X". That is, if the "final" becomes the "third mode" in the order of weak change (one-step change) and middle change (two-step change) (BH4b), middle change (two-step change) and weak change (two-step change) The big hit expectation is higher than the case (BH 4 a) where “final” becomes “third mode” in the order of one step change).

  Return to FIG. After executing the processing of step S90552, the effect control CPU 90120 determines one button development effect pattern belonging to the button development effect category determined in step S90552 (S90553).

  For example, when the button development effect category "BH2" is determined in step S90552, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command to be a fluctuation pattern "as shown in FIG. 50B. When PA4'-X "or" PA5'-X ", the button development effect pattern" BH2-1 "is determined at a rate of 36%, and the button development effect pattern" BH2-2 "is determined at a rate of 33% When the button development effect pattern "BH2-3" is determined at a rate of 31%, and the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'-X", The button development effect pattern "BH2-1" is determined at a ratio of 31%, and the button development effect pattern "BH2-2" is divided by 33%. In determined, to determine the button development effect pattern "BH2-3" at a rate of 36%. For example, in the ROM 90121, a button development for super reach (lost) which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X" or "PA5'-X" A presentation pattern (BH2-X) determination table is stored, and the table is compared with a random value for button development presentation pattern determination (for example, a random value updated in the presentation random number update process (S9077)) The numerical values may be assigned to "BH2-1", "BH2-2" and "BH2-3" at a ratio of 36:33:31. In addition, a button development effect pattern (BH2) for super reach (big hit), which is referred to when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'-X" −X) A determination table is stored, and in the table, numerical values to be compared with random numbers for button development effect pattern determination are 31 for “BH2-1”, “BH2-2” and “BH2-3”. : 33: 36 may be allocated.

  Further, for example, when the button development effect category “BH3a” is determined in step S90552, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command to be a fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. 50C. When it is "PA4'-X" or "PA5'-X", the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is determined at a rate of 55%, and the button development effect pattern "BH3a-2" at a rate of 45% When the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'-X", the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is decided at a ratio of 45%. The button development effect pattern "BH3a-2" is determined at a rate of 55%. For example, in the ROM 121, a button development for super reach (lost) which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X" or "PA5'-X". The effect pattern (BH3a-X) determination table is stored, and in the table, the numerical values to be compared with the random numbers for button development effect pattern determination are 55: 45 for "BH 3a-1" and "BH 3a-2". It should be assigned at the rate of In addition, a button development effect pattern for a super reach (big hit), which is referred to when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'-X" (BH3a −X) A determination table is stored, and in this table, numerical values to be compared with random numbers for button development effect pattern determination are allocated to “BH3a-1” and “BH3a-2” at a ratio of 45: 55 It should be done.

  When the button development effect category "BH1" is determined in step S90552, the button development effect pattern belonging to the button development effect category "BH1" is one type (button development effect pattern "BH1-1"). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50A, the fluctuation patterns designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command are the fluctuation patterns “PA4′-X”, “PA5′-X”, “PB4′-X”, “PB5 ′. Even if it is any of "-X", button development presentation pattern "BH1-1" is determined. When the button development effect category "BH4c" is determined in step S90552, the button development effect pattern belonging to the button development effect category "BH4c" is one type (button development effect pattern "BH4c-1"). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50 (G), the fluctuation patterns designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command are the fluctuation patterns "PA4'-X", "PA5'-X", "PB4'-X", "PB5 '. Even in any of -X, the button development effect pattern "BH4c-1" is determined.

  According to FIG. 50 (B), the determination ratio of button development effect category "BH2-3" to the determination ratio of button development effect pattern "BH2-1" is the variation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'-X". Is higher than the variation pattern "PA4'-X" or "PA5'-X". Further, according to FIG. 50 (C), the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH3a-2" to the determination ratio of the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is the variation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5 '." The case of -X is higher than the case of the variation pattern "PA4'-X" or "PA5'-X". The same applies to FIGS. 50 (D) to 50 (F). That is, the jackpot expectation is higher in the case where the change is performed at the later timing than in the case where the change is performed at the earlier timing.

  Return to FIG. After executing the process of step S90553, the effect control CPU 90120 determines an action effect such as a button (simply “action effect” in the drawing) (S90554), and ends the button development effect determination process. More specifically, in the process of step S90554, the effect control CPU 90120 changes the mode of the image such as the button at each of the timings 1 to 3 (“no change”, “weak change”, “medium change”, “strong change” In accordance with), the presence or absence of an execution of an action effect such as a button (and the effect mode in the case of execution) is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 49 (C).

  In the following description, the effect (character appearance) in which the character appears is referred to as "weak action effect" as the button effect or the like performed in the image display device 905, and the effect (cannon) in which the bombardment with a cannon is performed It may be referred to as a medium action effect, and an effect with a lightning strike (a lightning strike) may be referred to as a "strong action effect".

  For example, when the change mode of the image such as the button at a certain timing (timing 1 to 3) is "no change", the effect control CPU 90120 makes 70% of "action effect no" as shown in FIG. 49C. Determine the "weak action effect" at a rate of 20%, determine the "medium action effect" at a rate of 10%, and determine the "strong action effect" at a rate of 0%. For example, the ROM 90121 stores a change useless button etc effect effect determination table which is referred to when there is "no change", and the table is compared with a random value for the button etc effect determination. The numerical values may be allocated to “action effect nothing”, “weak action effect”, “medium action effect”, and “strong action effect” at a ratio of 70: 20: 10: 0.

  In addition, for example, when the change mode of the image such as the button at a certain timing (timing 1 to 3) is “weak change”, the effect control CPU 90120 sets “action effect nothing” to 20 as shown in FIG. Determine "weak action effect" at 70% rate, "medium action effect" at 8% rate, and "strong action effect" at 2% rate. For example, the ROM 90121 stores a weak change button etc. effect presentation determination table to be referred to when "weak change" is made, and the table is compared with a random value for determining a button etc. effect presentation The numerical values may be allocated to “action effect nothing”, “weak action effect”, “middle effect effect”, and “strong action effect” at a ratio of 20: 70: 8: 2.

  That is, in step S90553, for example, when the button development effect pattern "BH4b-1" is determined, timing 1 is "weak change", timing 2 is "no change", and timing 3 is "medium change". (Refer to FIG. 47), in the process of step S90554, the effect control CPU 90120 determines “action effect non-existence” at a ratio of 20% for button operation effect to “weak change” at timing 1, and “weak operation The effect is determined at a rate of 70%, the medium effect effect is determined at a rate of 8%, and the strong effect effect is determined at a rate of 2%. In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 determines 70% of “action effect none” at a ratio of 70%, and determines “weak action effect” at a ratio of 20% for button effects such as “no change” at timing 2. "Medium action effect" is determined at a rate of 10%, and "strong action effect" is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, the CPU 90120 for effect control determines “no effect effect” at a rate of 5% and determines “weak effect effect” at a rate of 20% for the button effect etc. with respect to the “intermediate change” at timing 3. "Medium action effect" is determined at a rate of 55%, and "strong action effect" is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, for example, when the button development effect pattern "BH1-1" is determined in step S90553, all the timings 1 to 3 are "no change" (see FIG. 47), but in the process of step S90554, The effect control CPU 90120 determines 70% of "action effect none" at a ratio of 70% and determines 20% of "weak operation effect" for button effects such as "no change" at each of timings 1 to 3. Then, "Medium action effect" is determined at a rate of 10%, and "strong action effect" is determined at a rate of 0%.

  According to FIG. 49 (C), when the effect such as button effect (weak effect, medium effect, strong effect) is executed, the image such as button changes more than when it is not executed (weak change, medium change, Strong change) easy to do. In addition, when the strong action effect is executed, the image of the button etc. always changes (weak change, medium change, strong change), and when the medium effect effect is executed, it is more than when the weak effect effect is executed. Images such as buttons are likely to change (weak change, medium change, strong change). Also, when the strong action presentation is performed, the change is more likely to occur than when the strong action presentation is not performed, and when the medium action presentation is performed, the medium change is more likely to occur than when the intermediate action presentation is not performed, When the weak effect presentation is performed, the change is more likely to occur than when the weak effect presentation is not performed.

  As described above, in step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), since the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the button development effect, etc. is also set as the use pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 performs button development effect Determination contents determined in the determination process (for example, (button development effect pattern), production mode of action effects such as buttons (“action effect none” in “timing 1 to 3”, “weak operation effect”, “middle effect effect”, Information to specify the other of "strong effect presentation" etc. is stored in RAM 90122 etc. In step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), RAM 90122 etc. are referred to, and presentation control corresponding to the presentation aspect etc. of button development presentation The pattern may also be set as a use pattern.

  FIG. 51 (A) is an explanatory view for explaining various periods in the button development effect. Before describing FIG. 51A, “T1” to “T14” illustrated in FIGS. 51 to 60 will be described. "T1" represents the start timing of the fluctuation. "T14" represents the end timing of the change. "T2" represents the timing of reaching the reach. "T3" represents the timing of developing into super reach. Super reach developed from "T3" ends at "T13". That is, "T13" represents the timing at which the result of the super reach (such as winning or losing) is displayed (notified).

  "T4" represents the timing of the start of display of an image such as a button. An image such as a button displayed from "T4" is erased to "T13". That is, "T4" to "T13" are display periods of buttons and the like (display periods of images such as buttons).

  "T6" represents "timing 1" in FIG. "T8" represents "timing 2" in FIG. "T10" represents "timing 3" in FIG. “T5” represents the timing at which the button or the like corresponding to the change of the image of the button or the like at the timing 1 (T6) (change nothing, weak change, medium change, strong change) is started. The effects such as the button started at "T5" end at "T6". That is, “T5” to “T6” are execution periods of the button etc. corresponding to the change of the image etc. of the button etc. at the timing 1. "T7" represents the timing at which the button or the like corresponding to the change in the image of the button or the like at timing 2 (T8) starts the execution of the effect presentation. The effects such as the button started at "T7" end at "T8". That is, “T7” to “T8” are the execution periods of the button etc. action effect corresponding to the change of the image etc. of the button etc. at the timing 2. “T9” represents the timing at which the button or the like corresponding to the change in the image of the button or the like at timing 3 (T10) starts the execution of the effect presentation. The effects such as the button started at "T9" end at "T10". That is, “T9” to “T10” are the execution periods of the button etc. effect corresponding to the change of the image etc. of the button etc. at the timing 3. Note that "T11" and "T12" will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 51A, a part (T11 to T13) of the button etc. display period (T4 to T13) is a valid period (operation is valid) of the button etc. (push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A) And the other periods (T4 to T11) are ineffective periods (periods in which the operation is not effective) such as a button. That is, "T11" represents the timing at which the operation of the button or the like becomes valid. During the ineffective period (T4 to T11), a "restriction line" is displayed superimposed on an image such as a button as an image for notifying that the ineffective period is in progress. In addition, during the effective period (T11 to T13), the "control line" is not displayed. That is, the "regulatory line" is erased at "T11".

  A period (T13 to T14) following the button display period (T4 to T13) is a period for displaying the result (e.g., winning or losing). More specifically, when there is no operation during the effective period (T11 to T13), when the effective period ends (T13), an image such as a button is erased and a period following the display period such as a button (T13 to T14) The result is displayed in). On the other hand, when the operation is performed during the effective period, when the operation is performed, the image such as the button is erased, and the result is displayed from the time of the operation. If there is an operation during the effective period, the effective period ends when there is an operation. Note that an effect such as displaying an image such as a button or the like during the effective period (T11 to T13) and displaying a result (such as winning or losing) after the image such as the button is erased may be referred to as "operation effect".

  Each of FIG. 51 (B)-FIG. 53 (B) is explanatory drawing explaining the flow of a specific button development effect.

(Specific example 1)
FIG. 51B shows the flow of the button development effect in the first example. In the specific example 1, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X". The effect control CPU 90120 determines to execute the button development effect in the button development effect determination process (S90529) (S90550), determines the button development effect category "BH1" (S90552), and executes the button development effect pattern "BH1. “1” is determined (S90553), “No effect presentation” is determined for the button etc. effect to the timing 1 (“No change in“ BH1-1 ””) (S90554), timing 2 (“BH1-1”) Then, "Weak effect effect (character appearance)" is determined for button etc. effect presentation for "No change" (S90554), and "Action for button etc effect presentation for timing 3 (" No change "for" BH1-1 ") It is assumed that "no effect" is decided. The determined content is set in step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), and as shown in FIG. 51B, the button development effect is executed.

  In the case of the button development effect pattern “BH1-1” determined in the first specific example, the image of the button or the like is also displayed in the first period (before “timing 1” / T4 to T6) and in the second period (“timing 1”) “Timing 2” / T6 to T8), the third period (“Timing 2” to “Timing 3” / T8 to T10), and the fourth period (“Timing 3” or later / T10 to T13) also have small buttons (white) (See FIG. 47), and in any of the button development effect patterns, a “restriction line” is displayed during the ineffective period (T4 to T11). The button development rendition is executed like. Further, in the first example, since “weak action effect (character appearance)” is determined for the timing 2 (no change), the character is made to appear in “T7” to “T8” but the image such as the button is not changed (Failure production).

(Specific example 2)
FIG. 52A shows the flow of the button development effect in the second example. In specific example 2, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X". The effect control CPU 90120 determines to execute the button development effect in the button development effect determination process (S90529) (S90550), determines the button development effect category "BH2" (S90552), and executes the button development effect pattern "BH2". 1) (S90553), "weak action effect" is determined for the button etc. effect for the timing 1 ("weak change (first to second in the case of BH2-1") "(S90554), timing "No effect presentation" is determined for button effect presentation for 2 ("no change" for "BH2-1") (S90554), button effect presentation for timing 3 ("no change" for "BH2-1") "Weak action effect" is determined for. The determined content is set in step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), and as shown in FIG. 52A, the button development effect is executed.

  In the case of the button development effect pattern “BH2-1” determined in the specific example 2, the button etc. image is “first mode (small button (white) in the first period (before“ timing 1 ”/ T4 to T6) And the third period (“timing 2” to “timing 3” / T8 to T10) or the fourth period (“timing 1” to “timing 2” / T6 to T8). At timing 3 ”and after / T10 to T13), the“ second mode (large button (white)) ”is displayed (see FIG. 47), and in any button development effect pattern, the ineffective period (T4 to T11) In order to display a “regulator line”, in the second embodiment, a button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 52 (A). Further, in the second specific example, since “weak action effect (character appearance)” is determined for timing 1 (weak change), the character is made to appear in “T5” to “T6” and an image such as a button is displayed in “T6”. The "first mode (small button (white))" is changed to "the second mode (large button (white))" (changed by one step) (success effect). Further, in the second example, since “weak action effect (character appearance)” is determined for timing 3 (no change), the character is made to appear in “T9” to “T10” but an image such as a button is made in “T10” It has not changed (a failure production).

(Specific example 3)
FIG. 52B shows the flow of the button development effect in the third example. In the specific example 3, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PB4'-X". Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines to execute the button development effect in the button development effect determination process (S90529) (S90550), determines the button development effect category "BH3a" (S90552), and executes the button development effect pattern "BH3a". “2” is determined (S90553), “No effect presentation” is determined for button etc. effect presentation with respect to timing 1 (“No change in BH3a-2”) (S90554), timing 2 (“BH3a-2”) Then, "No effect presentation" is determined for the button etc. effect presentation for "weak change (1st → 2nd)" (S90554), and "weak change (2nd → 3rd)" at timing 3 ("BH3a-2") “Weak action effect” is determined for the button etc. The determined content is set in step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), and as shown in FIG. 52B, the button development effect is executed.

  In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH3a-2" determined in the specific example 3, the image such as the button has a first period (before "timing 1" / T4 to T6) and a second period ("timing 1" to " In the “timing 2” / T6 to T8, the “first mode (small button (white))” is selected, and in the third period (“timing 2” to “timing 3” / T8 to T10), the “second mode (large Button (white)), and in the fourth period (after “timing 3” / T10 to T13), it becomes “third mode (large button (red))” (see FIG. 47), and either button development effect Even in the case of the pattern, in order to display the “control line” during the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in the third example, the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 52 (B). Further, in the third example, since “action effect non-existence” is determined for the timing 2 (weak change), the character etc. is not made to appear in “T7” to “T8”, and the button etc. It is changed (one step change) from the mode (small button (white)) to the "second mode (large button (white))". Further, in the third example, since “weak action effect (character appearance)” is determined for timing 3 (weak change), characters are made to appear in “T9” to “T10” and images such as buttons are displayed in “T10”. Change from “second mode (large button (white))” to “third mode (large button (red))” (changed by one step) (success effect).

(Specific example 4)
FIG. 53A shows the flow of the button development effect in the fourth example. In the fourth example, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PB5'-X". Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines to execute the button development effect in the button development effect determination process (S90529) (S90550), determines the button development effect category "BH4b" (S90552), and executes the button development effect pattern "BH4b". Decide -1 "(S90553)," Weak effect presentation "is determined for button etc effect presentation for timing 1 (" Weak change (1st → 2nd in BH4b-1 ")" (S90554), timing "No effect presentation" is determined for the button etc. effect presentation for 2 ("no change" for "BH4b-1") (S90554), and "intermediate change (second to fourth)" for timing 3 ("BH4b-1") It is assumed that "middle effect representation" is determined for the button etc. The determined content is set in step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), and as shown in FIG. 53A, the button development effect is executed.

  In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH4b-1" determined in the specific example 4, the image such as the button is "first mode (small button (white)" in the first period (before "timing 1" / T4 to T6) In the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2” / T6 to T8) and in the third period (“timing 2” to “timing 3” / T8 to T10) ”. Button (white)), and in the fourth period (after “timing 3” / T10 to T13), the “fourth mode (stick)” (see FIG. 47), and any button development effect pattern In the fourth embodiment, the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 53A in order to display the “control line” during the ineffective period (T4 to T11). Further, in the fourth example, since “weak action effect (character appearance)” is determined for timing 1 (weak change), characters are made to appear in “T5” to “T6”, and images such as buttons are displayed in “T6”. The "first mode (small button (white))" is changed to "the second mode (large button (white))" (changed by one step) (success effect). Further, in the fourth example, since "medium effect effect (cannon)" is determined for timing 3 (middle change), the cannon is made to appear in "T9" to "T10", and the button etc. The second mode (large button (white)) is changed to a fourth mode (stick) (two-step change) (success effect).

(Specific example 5)
FIG. 53B shows the flow of the button development effect in the fifth example. In the fifth example, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PB5'-X". Further, the CPU for effect control 120 determines to execute the button development effect in the button development effect determination process (S90529) (S90550), determines the button development effect category "BH4c" (S90552), and executes the button development effect pattern "BH4c". “1” is determined (S90553), “No effect presentation” is determined for button etc. effect presentation with respect to timing 1 (“No change in BH4c-1”) (S90554), timing 2 (“BH4c-1”) Then, "action presentation nothing" is determined for the button etc. effect presentation for "no change" (S90554), and the button etc. effect presentation for timing 3 ("strong change (first to fourth)" for "BH4c-1") It is assumed that the “strong action effect” has been determined for.

  In the case of the button development effect pattern “BH4c-1” determined in the fifth specific example, the image of the button or the like has a first period (before “timing 1” / T4 to T6) and a second period (“timing 1” to In the “timing 2” / T6 to T8) and the third period (“timing 2” to “timing 3” / T8 to T10), the “first mode (small button (white))” is obtained, and the fourth period At timing 3 "and after / T10 to T13), the" fourth mode (stick) "is obtained (see FIG. 47), and in any button development effect pattern, during the ineffective period (T4 to T11)," regulation " In order to display a “line”, in the fifth example, a button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 53 (B). Further, in the fifth example, since “strong action effect (lightening lightning)” is determined for the timing 3 (strong change), a thundercloud is made to appear in “T9” to “T10” and an image such as a button is displayed in “T10”. Change from the first mode (small button (white)) to the "fourth mode (stick)" (three-step change) (success effect).

  54 to 60 are diagrams showing an example of display operation in the display area of the image display device 5. FIG. In FIGS. 54 to 60, character C 901 is an enemy character appearing in super reach α and super reach β, character C 902 is an enemy character appearing in super reach α, and character C 903 is an enemy character appearing in super reach β. It is.

  FIG. 54 and FIG. 55 show display operation examples of the specific example 3 (T2 and subsequent ones) shown in FIG. 52 (B). Specifically, FIG. 54 (A) → FIG. 54 (B) → FIG. 54 (C) → FIG. 54 (D) → FIG. 54 (E) → FIG. 54 (F) → FIG. 55 (G) → FIG. H) → FIG. 55 (I) → FIG. 55 (J) → FIG. 55 (K) → FIG. 55 (L) → FIG. 55 (M). FIG. 54 (A) shows a scene (T2) which has reached reach. FIG. 54 (B) shows a scene (T3) in which the super reach α is reached. FIG. 54C is a scene (T4) when the display of the small button (white) D901 is started. Since the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 54C, the restriction line K90 is displayed superimposed on the small button (white) D901.

  FIG. 54D is a scene (T5) at which execution of action presentation such as a button corresponding to a change at timing 1 or the like (no change, weak change, moderate change, strong change) is started. In the third example, since the button etc. effect corresponding to the change at the timing 1 etc. is not executed, the display in FIG. 54 (D) is the same as in FIG. 54 (C) (except for the operation of the characters C901 and C902). ing. FIG. 54E shows a scene (T6) where a change or the like at timing 1 is performed. In the third example, since there is no change at the timing 1, in FIG. 54 (E), the display is the same as that in FIG. 54 (D) (except for the operation of the character C901 and the character C902).

  FIG. 54F is a scene (T7) at which the execution of an action effect such as a button corresponding to a change in timing 2 or the like (no change, weak change, moderate change, strong change) is started. In the third example, since the button etc. effect corresponding to the change at the timing 2 etc. is not executed, the display in FIG. 54 (F) is the same as in FIG. 54 (E) (except for the operation of the characters C901 and C902). ing. FIG. 55 (G) shows a scene (T8) where a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. In the third example, since a weak change occurs at timing 2, in FIG. 55 (G), the small button (white) D901 changes to a large button (white) D902 (one step change). Since the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 55 (G), the restriction line K90 is displayed superimposed on the large button (white) D902.

  FIG. 55 (H) is a scene (T9) at which execution of action presentation such as a button corresponding to a change at timing 3 or the like (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) is started. In the third example, the weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as a button effect effect corresponding to the change at the timing 3, etc. Therefore, in FIG. 55 (H), the character JS (code "JS" is not The image JS 901, which is illustrated, the same applies in the same manner, is displayed. FIG. 55I is a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. In the third example, since the change is weak at timing 3, the large button (white) D 902 changes to a large button (red) D 903 (one step change) in FIG. Since it is an ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 55 (I), the restriction line K90 is displayed superimposed on the large button (red) D903. Further, in FIG. 55 (I), an image JS 902 in which character JS is pleased is also displayed.

  FIG. 55 (J) is a scene (T11) in which the operation (the operation of the push button 9031B) corresponding to the large button (red) D 903 is enabled. Since the valid period (T11 to T13) has been reached, the restriction line K90 is not displayed in FIG. 55 (J). FIG. 55 (K) is a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. 55 (J). In order to urge the player to operate the push button 9031 B, the large button (red) D 903 displayed at the lower right of the display area in FIG. 55 (J) is displayed as the large button (red) D 903 U in FIG. It is displayed large in the central part of the area. Note that in FIG. 55 (K), information (gauge, numerical value) may be displayed to notify the amount of the remaining effective period. The same applies to FIGS. 57 (K), 58 (E), 59 (E), and 60 (E). In FIG. 52 (B), for convenience of illustration, the position of T12 is described separately from the position of T11. The same applies to the other drawings in FIG. 51 (B) and the like.

  In FIG. 55 (L), the player pushes the scene when the player operates the push button 9031B during the valid period (T11 to T13) or during the valid period (T11 to T13). It is a scene (T13) when the effective period in the case of not operating the button 9031B ends. In specific example 3, since it becomes a big hit, character C 901 which is an ally character wins. That is, as a result of the operation (the operation of the push button 9031 B) corresponding to the large button (red) D 903 (large button (red) D 903 U), the outcome (win of the character C 901) is notified. In FIG. 55 (L), it is described that the player does not operate the push button 9031B as T13. The same applies to other figures. FIG. 55 (M) shows a scene (T14) when the variable display ends. The fanfare effect is executed immediately after FIG. 55 (M).

  56 and 57 show display operation examples of the fourth specific example (T2 and after) shown in FIG. 53 (A). Specifically, FIG. 56 (A) → FIG. 56 (B) → FIG. 56 (C) → FIG. 56 (D) → FIG. 56 (E) → FIG. 56 (F) → FIG. 57 (G) → FIG. H) → FIG. 57 (I) → FIG. 57 (J) → FIG. 57 (K) → FIG. 57 (L) → FIG. 57 (M). FIG. 56 (A) shows a scene (T2) which has reached reach. FIG. 56 (B) shows a scene (T3) in which the super reach β is reached. FIG. 56C is a scene (T4) when the display of the small button (white) D901 is started. Because of the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 56C, the restriction line K90 is displayed superimposed on the small button (white) D901.

  FIG. 56D is a scene (T5) at which execution of action presentation such as a button corresponding to a change at timing 1 or the like (no change, weak change, moderate change, strong change) is started. In the fourth example, the weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as a button effect effect corresponding to the change at the timing 1, etc. Therefore, in FIG. 56 (D), the image JS 901 that the character JS prays as the weak action effect is displayed. ing. FIG. 56E shows a scene (T6) in which a change or the like at timing 1 is performed. In the fourth example, since a weak change occurs at timing 1, in FIG. 56E, the small button (white) D 901 changes to a large button (white) D 902 (one-step change). Because of the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 56E, the restriction line K90 is displayed superimposed on the large button (white) D902. Further, in FIG. 56 (E), an image JS 902 in which character JS is pleased is also displayed.

  FIG. 56F is a scene (T7) at which execution of action presentation such as a button corresponding to a change in timing 2 or the like (no change, weak change, moderate change, strong change) is started. In the fourth example, since the button etc. effect corresponding to the change at the timing 2 is not executed, the display in FIG. 56 (F) is the same as the display in FIG. 56 (E) (except for the operation of the characters C901 and C903). ing. FIG. 57G shows a scene (T8) where a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. Since there is no change in timing 2 in the fourth example, in FIG. 57G, the same display as in FIG. 56F (except for the operation of the character C901 and the character C903) is used.

  FIG. 57H shows a scene (T9) at which execution of action presentation such as a button corresponding to a change in timing 3 or the like (no change, weak change, moderate change, strong change) is started. In the fourth example, since the middle action effect (cannon) is executed as a button etc. effect corresponding to the change at the timing 3 or the like, the image TS901 of the cannon is displayed as the middle action effect in FIG. FIG. 57I is a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. In the fourth example, since the change is middle at timing 3, the large button (white) D 902 changes to the stick D 904 (two-step change) in FIG. Since it is a non-effective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 57I, the restriction line K90 is displayed superimposed on the stick D904. Further, in FIG. 57I, an image TS 902 of the smoke of the firing gun and an image TS 903 of the impact at the time of the hit are also displayed. In addition, when it does not change in a middle effect production (that is, when it is a failure production), for example, it may not fire, or it may not hit even if it fires.

  FIG. 57J is a scene (T11) in which the operation (the operation of the stick controller 9031A) corresponding to the stick D 904 has become effective. Since the valid period (T11 to T13) has been reached, the restriction line K90 is not displayed in FIG. 57 (J). FIG. 57 (K) shows a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. 57 (J). In order to urge the player to operate the stick controller 9031A, the stick D904 displayed at the lower right of the display area in FIG. 57 (J) is largely displayed at the center of the display area as the stick D904U in FIG. 57 (K). ing.

  FIG. 57 (L) shows a scene when the player operates the stick controller 9031A during the effective period (T11 to T13), or the player sticks during the effective period (T11 to T13). It is a scene (T13) when the effective period in the case of not operating the controller 9031A ends. In the fourth example, since it becomes a big hit, the character C 901 which is an ally character wins. That is, as a result of the operation (the operation of the stick controller 9031A) corresponding to the stick D 904 (stick D 904U), the outcome of the victory (the victory of the character C 901) is notified. FIG. 57M shows a scene (T14) when the variable display ends. The fanfare effect is executed immediately after FIG. 57 (M).

  FIG. 58 shows a display operation example of the specific example 1 (T8 or later) shown in FIG. 51 (B). Specifically, the transition is as in FIG. 58 (A) → FIG. 58 (B) → FIG. 58 (C) → FIG. 58 (D) → FIG. 58 (E) → FIG. 58 (F) → FIG. 58 (G) Do. FIG. 58A shows a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. In the first example, since there is no change at the timing 2, the small button (white) D 901 is displayed in FIG. Since the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 58A, the restriction line K90 is displayed superimposed on the small button (white) D901. In the first example, although a weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as a button etc. corresponding to a change at timing 2 (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change), the change at timing 2 is Since there is no (i.e., a failure effect), the image JS 902 to which the character JS is pleased is not displayed in FIG. 58 (A).

  FIG. 58 (B) shows a scene (T9) where the execution of the button etc. corresponding to the change at timing 3 is started. In the example 1, since the button etc. effect corresponding to the change etc. in the timing 3 is not executed, in FIG. 58 (B), it becomes the same display as FIG. 58 (A) (except for the operation of the characters C901 and C902). ing. FIG. 58C shows a scene (T10) where a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. Since there is no change in timing 3 in the first example, in FIG. 58 (C), the same display as in FIG. 58 (B) (except for the operation of the character C901 and the character C902) is given.

  FIG. 58D is a scene (T11) in which the operation (the operation of the push button 9031B) corresponding to the small button (white) D901 has become effective. Since the valid period (T11 to T13) has been reached, the restriction line K90 is not displayed in FIG. 58 (D). FIG. 58E shows a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. 58D. In order to urge the player to operate the push button 9031 B, the small button (white) D 901 displayed at the lower right of the display area in FIG. 58D is displayed as the small button (white) D 901 U in FIG. It is displayed large in the central part of the area.

  FIG. 58F shows a scene when the player operates the push button 9031 B during the valid period (T11 to T13), or the player pushes on the valid period (T11 to T13). It is a scene (T13) when the effective period in the case of not operating the button 9031B ends. In the specific example 1, since it is a loss, character C902 which is an enemy character has won. That is, as a result of the operation (the operation of the push button 9031 B) corresponding to the small button (white) D 901 (small button (white) D 901 U), an outcome (win of the character C 902) is notified. FIG. 58G shows a scene (T14) when the variable display ends. The following variable display is performed immediately after FIG. 58 (G).

  FIG. 59 shows a display operation example of the specific example 2 (T8 or later) shown in FIG. 52 (A). Specifically, the transition is as shown in FIG. 59 (A) → FIG. 59 (B) → FIG. 59 (C) → FIG. 59 (D) → FIG. 59 (E) → FIG. 59 (F) → FIG. Do. FIG. 59A shows a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. Since there is no change in the timing 2 in the second example, the large button (white) D 902 is displayed in FIG. Since the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 59A, the restriction line K is displayed superimposed on the large button (white) D902.

  FIG. 59 (B) shows a scene (T9) at which execution of action presentation such as a button corresponding to a change at timing 3 is started. In the second example, the weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as a button action effect corresponding to the change at timing 3 etc., so in FIG. 59 (B), the image JS 901 that the character JS prays as the weak action effect is displayed. ing. FIG. 59C shows a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. Since there is no change in timing 3 in the second example, in FIG. 59 (C), the same display as in FIG. 59 (B) (except for the operation of the character C901 and the character C902) is given. Since the effect is a failure effect, the image JS 902 to which the character JS is pleased is not displayed in FIG. 59 (C).

  FIG. 59D is a scene (T11) in which the operation (the operation of the push button 9031B) corresponding to the large button (white) D902 has become effective. Since the valid period (T11 to T13) has been reached, the restriction line K90 is not displayed in FIG. 59 (D). FIG. 59E shows a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. 59D. In order to urge the player to operate the push button 9031 B, the large button (white) D 902 displayed at the lower right of the display area in FIG. 59D is displayed as the large button (white) D 902 U in FIG. It is displayed large in the central part of the area.

  In FIG. 59F, the player pushes the scene when the player operates the push button 9031B during the valid period (T11 to T13) or the player presses the push button 9031B during the valid period (T11 to T13). It is a scene (T13) when the effective period in the case of not operating the button 9031B ends. In the second example, the enemy character C902 wins because it is a loss. That is, as a result of the operation (the operation of the push button 9031 B) corresponding to the large button (white) D 902 (large button (white) D 902 U), the outcome (win of the character C 902) is notified. FIG. 59G shows a scene (T14) when the variable display ends. Note that the next variable display is performed immediately after FIG. 59 (G).

  FIG. 60 shows a display operation example of the specific example 5 (T8 or later) shown in FIG. 53 (B). Specifically, the transition as in FIG. 60 (A) → FIG. 60 (B) → FIG. 60 (C) → FIG. 60 (D) → FIG. 60 (E) → FIG. 60 (F) → FIG. 60 (G) Do. FIG. 60A shows a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. In the second example, since there is no change at the timing 2, the small button (white) D1 is displayed in FIG. Because of the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 60A, the restriction line K is displayed superimposed on the small button (white) D1.

  FIG. 60 (B) shows a scene (T9) at which execution of an effect presentation such as a button corresponding to a change at timing 3 is started. In the fifth example, a strong action effect (strike) is executed as a button effect effect corresponding to a change at timing 3 or the like, so in FIG. 60 (B), an image KS 901 of a thundercloud is displayed as a strong action effect. FIG. 60C shows a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. In the fifth example, since a strong change occurs at timing 3, the small button (white) D 901 changes to a stick D 904 (three-step change) in FIG. 60 (C). Since the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 60C, the restriction line K90 is displayed superimposed on the stick D904. Further, in FIG. 60C, an image KS 902 of a lightning bolt and an image KS 903 of an impact at the time of hitting are also displayed. According to FIG. 49C, a change is always made in the strong action production, but if there is no change in the strong action production (that is, if it is a failure effect), for example, there are no lightning strikes or lightning strikes. You may not try to hit it.

  Since FIGS. 60D to 60G are similar to FIGS. 57J to 57M, the description will be omitted.

  Note that the player may be required to perform a continuous hit operation (described later) or a long press operation (described later) as the operation during the effective period (T11 to T13). In addition, during the effective period (T11 to T13), an auto button or an automatic continuous hitting function described below may be enabled.

(About auto button, auto double hit)
Subsequently, the auto button will be described. The effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, whether to enable or disable the function of the auto button (described later) before executing the effect determination process (S90150) at the time of winning in the effect control process (S9076). The auto button setting process of may be executed. That is, in the effect control process (S9076), the effect control CPU 90120 executes the auto button setting process, and then executes the effect determination process at winning (S90150), and then, the effect control flag setting unit 90191, etc. Depending on the value of the rendering process flag provided in any one of the processes in steps S90170 to 90177 can be selected and executed. The auto button setting process may be performed regardless of the value of the rendering process flag, and for example, the auto button setting may be performed after the winning combination rendering process (S90150) is performed in the rendering control process (S9076). The process may be executed, or the auto button setting process may be executed before the effect control process process (S9076) is performed in the effect control main process (FIG. 42).

  In the following description, the button advance notice is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the notice is displayed based on the detection of the single-shot operation or the continuous hitting operation of the button etc. (push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A) in the button advance effect. Shall be displayed. The "single-shot operation" means that a button or the like is operated once, and the "continuous hitting operation" means that the button or the like is operated a plurality of times consecutively.

  In addition, the button advance presentation effect is the button development presentation described above, and the result (superiority etc.) of the super reach is displayed based on the detection of a single-shot operation such as a button or the continuous hitting operation in the button development presentation (during the effective period). May be

  Also, with the "auto button", the player actually executes the processing assuming that the button or the like (push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A) is not operated, but the button or the like is operated. It is. That is, when the function of the auto button is set to be effective, even if the button or the like is not operated, the processing is executed on the assumption that the button or the like is operated one by one or continuously hit, and the advance notice is displayed.

  In addition, with “automatic consecutive strikes”, the player continues to operate the button etc. (for example, long press on the push button 9031 B, long stick on the stick controller 9031 A, etc.) There are also cases where it is referred to as “push operation”), but the button or the like is operated a plurality of times continuously (for example, the continuous hitting of the push button 9031B, the operation of continuously pulling the stick controller 9031A, etc.) It is a function to detect as. That is, when the function of automatic continuous hitting is set to be effective, even if the button etc. is not operated a plurality of times consecutively, the processing is executed assuming that the button etc. is operated continuously and a notice display is displayed. Do.

  Moreover, although one type may be sufficient as button advance production | presentation, multiple types may be sufficient as it. Hereinafter, it is assumed that a button preview effect A, a button preview effect B, and a button preview effect C) are prepared as a plurality of types of button preview effects. For example, when the effective period is started, button display effect A and button display effect B display a gauge display according to the number of times of operation of push button 9031 B, and whenever an operation of push button 9031 B is detected, gauge display The display is updated in such a manner that the scale of 1 has decreased by one, and when the number of times the operation is detected reaches a predetermined number of times (that is, the scale of the gauge display becomes 0), it is determined that the operation condition is satisfied. It is like displaying a notice display (for example, a character string such as “excessive heat!” Or “chance!”). In addition, for example, when the operation of the push button 9031B is detected once during the effective period, the button announcement effect C determines that the operation condition is satisfied, and displays an announcement (for example, the character A or the character B). It is like doing.

  In the following description, in addition to the button advance notice effect, the back button advance notice effect is provided in which the light emitting member 909 CC or the like is caused to emit light in a predetermined mode based on detection of the operation of the button or the like during the effective period. Do. In the button preview effect, when the effective period is started, a notification to indicate that the operation is effective or to prompt the operation is performed, while in the back button preview effect, the effective period (hereinafter, effective in the button preview effect) In order to distinguish it from the period, even when the special effective period may be called), notification that the operation is effective or indicating that the operation is effective is not performed. Therefore, there is a fun way to search for and execute a special effective period in the back button advance notice effect. From this characteristic of the back button advance notice effect, in the present embodiment, even if the function of the auto button is set to be effective, the back button advance notice is performed unless an operation such as a button is detected in the special effective period. Control is not performed to cause the light emitting members 909 CC and the like to emit light in a predetermined mode by the effect.

  In this embodiment, the auto button setting process is executed to execute an arbitrary timing (for example, a period during demonstration screen display, a period during which variable display of a decorative symbol is performed, a period during big hit game) It becomes possible to set whether the function of the auto button is enabled or disabled based on the operation of the button or the like. Further, in this embodiment, in addition to the setting of the auto button by the auto button setting process, the setting of the auto button can also be performed from the setting menu (menu screen on which setting of background image, volume, brightness etc. is possible). I assume. In the present embodiment, the auto-continuous hitting function is always enabled, but, like the auto button function, it may be possible to set whether to enable or disable.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the auto button setting process. In FIG. 61 (also in FIGS. 62 and 63), the operation of the push button 9031B is described as the operation of the button or the like, but the same applies to the stick controller 9031A.

  In the auto button setting process, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not an auto button valid flag indicating that the function of the auto button is valid is set (step S907101).

  When it is determined that the auto button valid flag is not set (step S907101; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 sets an operation valid period flag indicating that the operation in the button advance effect is in the valid period. It is checked whether or not it is (step S907102). If the flag is set during the operation valid period (step S907102; YES), the auto button setting process is ended.

  If it is determined that the flag is not set during the operation effective period (step S907102; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 checks whether the long press operation of the push button 9031B is detected (step S907103) . If the long press operation of the push button 9031 B is not detected (step S 907 103; NO), the auto button setting process is ended. As to whether or not the long press operation of the push button 9031 B is detected, for example, in the timer interruption, the operation detection flag is set when the press operation of the push button 9031 B is detected, and the operation detection is performed when the press operation is not detected. The flag is configured to be reset, and it is determined that the long press operation is detected when the operation detection flag is set and the state where the press operation of the push button 9031 B is detected continues for a predetermined period. You may do so.

  If the long press operation of the push button is detected (step S907103; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 sets an auto button valid flag (step S907104).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the image display device 5 to display an auto button valid display indicating that the function of the auto button is valid (step S907105). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 performs control to output an auto button effective sound indicating that the function of the auto button is effective (step S907106). In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 has the auto button function set to be different from that for the normal light emission mode (for example, emitting light in white) for the push button LED (LED provided to the push button 9031 B) Is controlled to emit light according to a special light emission mode (for example, light emission in red) for notifying (step S907107).

  If it is determined that the auto button valid flag is set (step S 907 101; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 has a special operation valid period flag indicating that it is in the valid period of the operation in the back button advance notice effect. It is checked whether it is set (step S907108). If the special operation valid period flag is set (step S907108; YES), the auto button setting process is ended.

  If it is determined that the flag is not set during the special operation effective period (step S907108; NO), whether or not the setting menu displaying flag indicating that the setting menu is being displayed is set. It is confirmed whether or not it is set (step S907109), and if it is set (step S907109); YES, the auto button setting process is ended.

  When the setting menu display flag is not set (step S907109; NO), the CPU 90120 for effect control checks whether or not the pressing operation (single operation) of the push button 9031B is detected (step S907110). If the pressing operation (single-shot operation) of the push button 9031 B is not detected, the auto button setting process is ended.

  If the pressing operation (single-shot operation) of the push button 9031 B is detected (step S 907 110; YES), the effect control CPU 90 120 resets the auto button valid flag (step S 907 111).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the image display device 905 to display an auto button invalidation display indicating that the function of the auto button is invalid (step S907112). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 performs control to output an auto button invalidation effect sound (effect sound different from the above-described auto button effective effect sound) indicating that the function of the auto button is ineffective (step S907113). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 performs control to cause the push button LED to emit light in the normal light emission mode (step S907114).

  As described above, the auto button setting process has been described with reference to FIG. 61. However, by executing the auto button setting process shown in FIG. 61, the function of the auto button can be set to be valid or invalid at any timing. Specifically, the player can set the auto button function to be effective by performing the long press operation on the push button 9031 B while the function of the auto button is invalid (see steps S 907 101, S 907 103, and S 907 104). The auto button function can be set to be invalidated by pressing the push button 9031 B (single-shot operation) while the auto button function is enabled (see steps S 907 101, S 907 110, and S 907 111). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily change the setting of the auto button function not only during the demonstration screen display but also during the period during which the decorative symbol is variably displayed or during the big hit game. it can. That is, the setting of the auto button function can be easily changed without interrupting the game once, and it is possible to prevent the interest from being lowered by the interruption.

  However, in the present embodiment, a period in which the setting change of the auto button function is not received exceptionally is provided. For example, when the function of the auto button is invalidated, the long press operation may be performed to display the advance notice display during the effective period in the button advance effect, but the function of the auto button is performed according to the long press operation. When the setting of is changed, the setting change which the player does not intend is performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the long press operation of the push button 9031 B is detected during the effective period of the operation in the button advance presentation effect (that is, when the flag is set during the operation effective period), It is configured not to change the function from invalid to valid (see step S907102). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an unintended change in setting of the function of the auto button.

  In addition, during the effective period of the operation in the back button advance notice effect, the decision display effect (shows the hit or not as a success or failure notification based on the detection of the pressing operation of the push button 9031B during the effective period (one-shot operation) Since the predetermined control is performed based on the detection of the pressing operation (single-shot operation) during the effective period in the effect of displaying the), the player does not have to perform the long-press operation. However, since it is assumed that the intention to perform a one-shot operation results in a long press operation, the operation period of the back button advance notice effect is valid (that is, when the flag is set during the special operation validity period) Or, even during the effective period of the operation in the determination button effect (when the determination button effect operation effective period flag indicating that it is in the effective period of the operation in the determination button effect is set), long press on the push button 9031B Even if the operation is detected, the function of the auto button may be configured not to be changed from disabled to enabled. Similarly, a single-shot operation of the push button 9031B may be performed to change the setting of the background image and the setting of the auto button from the setting menu being displayed, but the intention of performing the one-shot operation results in a long press operation. Since it is also assumed that the setting button is displayed (that is, when the setting menu display flag is set), the function of the auto button is set even if the long press operation of the push button 9031 B is detected. You may be configured not to change from invalid to valid.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even when the function of the auto button is set to be effective, in order to execute the back button advance presentation effect, the pressing operation of the push button 9031 B must be performed. ing. Therefore, during the effective period of the operation in the back button advance notice effect, an operation for executing the back button advance notice effect may be performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the auto button is detected even if the pressing operation of the push button 9031 B is detected during the effective period of the operation in the back button advance notice effect (that is, when the flag is set during the special operation effective period). It is configured not to change the function of from valid to invalid (see step S907108). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an unintended change in setting of the function of the auto button.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the pressing operation of the push button 9031 B may be performed to change the setting of the background image and the setting of the auto button from the setting menu. Therefore, in the present embodiment, while the setting menu is displayed (that is, when the setting menu display flag is set), the function of the auto button is enabled or disabled even if the pressing operation of the push button 9031B is detected. (Step S907109). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an unintended change in setting of the function of the auto button.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the function of the auto button is set to be effective, the button preview effect is started, and when the player operates the push button 9031 B according to the button preview effect, the auto button Is changed from valid to invalid (for example, realized by the processing of steps S907101 and S907108 to S907111), but in addition to the function of the auto button is changed from valid to invalid, the detection result of the operation May be configured to be reflected in the button preview effect. With such a configuration, even if the function of the auto button is set to be effective, if the player wants to perform an operation, the operation can be immediately reflected in the effect.

  When the player operates the push button 9031B in accordance with the button advance effect started when the function of the auto button is set to be enabled, the function of the auto button is changed from enabled to invalid. Instead of the configuration, for example, the setting of the function of the auto button is not changed during execution of the button preview effect, and the function of the auto button is changed from enabled to disabled after the end of the button preview effect. Good. The configuration for changing the function of the auto button from valid to invalid after the end of the button preview effect can be realized, for example, by executing the following processing. When the CPU 90120 for effect control detects the operation of the push button 9031 B in step S 907 110, it executes the processing of steps S 907 111 to S 907 114 if it is not in the effective period of the button advance effect, and the automatic button function is effective if it is in the effective period. A process of setting an auto button change suspension flag indicating that the change of the state to the invalid state is suspended is executed, and the auto button setting process is ended without executing the processes of steps S907111 to S907114. Then, the effect control CPU 90120 has the function of the auto button if the auto button change suspension flag is set at the end of the button advance effect (for example, the timing when the advance notice is displayed or the end timing of the effective period). Change from valid to invalid (that is, reset the auto button valid flag and reset the auto button change pending flag). In the configuration where the function of the auto button is changed from enabled to disabled after completion of the button advance effect (configuration in which the change in setting of the auto button function is temporarily held), the continuous hitting operation of the push button 9031B is Among button preview effect A and button preview effect B in which the preview display is displayed based on the detection, and button preview effect C in which the preview display is displayed based on detection of the one-shot operation of push button 9031B. The present invention may be applied to either one or both.

  When the player operates the push button 9031 B in response to the button advance effect, the function of the auto button is changed from active to ineffective after the end of the button advance effect. In addition to detecting the operation of the push button 9031B at predetermined intervals by the function, it may be detected that the player actually operated the push button 9031B and reflected in the effect. That is, the continuous hit operation by the automatic button and the operation actually performed may be reflected in the effect. In such a configuration, for example, when the auto button change suspension flag is set, the value of the operation number counter (effect according to the value is performed) is updated at predetermined intervals by the function of the auto button. In addition to the above, this is realized by updating the value of the operation number counter according to the operation of the push button 9031B.

  Also, for example, when the push button 9031 B is configured to be deformable, and the push button 9031 B is deformed into a shape different from the normal state in accordance with a predetermined effect (that is, the effect is being executed with the deformation of the push button 9031 B Also in the case where the pressing operation of the push button 9031 B is detected, the setting of the auto button may not be changed. For example, in the case where the operation is strongly urged by deforming the push button 9031B, it is conceivable that there is no intention to change the setting even if the operation is performed. When the push button 9031 B is deformed to a shape different from the normal state, for example, the button portion is deformed to be projected to the player side more than the normal state, or combined in the normal state. In addition to the case where the button parts are separated or the case where a plurality of parts for button parts are combined to form one button part, etc., it is rotatable (for example, around the rotation axis in the vertical direction) The case where the rotatable or rotatable button portion around the horizontal rotation axis is rotated is also included.

  Next, a display mode in the case of setting the function of the auto button to valid or invalid will be described. FIG. 62 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the display mode in the case where the function of the auto button is set to be valid or invalid. In FIG. 62, the modes of the display screen transition in the order of (1) (2) (3). In the case of FIG. 62 (1), it is assumed that the function of the auto button is set to be invalid.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (1), when the player performs a long press operation on the push button 9031B while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being performed, as shown in FIG. 62 (2), the auto button Is set to be valid, a character string such as "auto button valid" is displayed on the image display device 905, and a message is displayed to the effect that the function of the auto button is set to be valid. At this time, control is performed to output the auto button effective effect sound from the speaker 908, and control to cause the push button 9031B to emit light in a special light emission mode (see steps S907103 to S907107).

  Also, when the function of the auto button is set to be effective, and the pressing operation (single-shot operation) of the push button 9031 B is performed by the player, the function of the auto button is invalidated as shown in FIG. The image display device 905 displays a character string such as "auto button invalid" and displays that the function of the auto button is set to be invalid. Further, at this time, control to output the auto button invalidation sound from the speaker 908 and control to cause the push button 9031 B to emit light in the normal light emission mode are performed (see steps S 907 110 to S 907 114).

  In the example of FIG. 62, the setting of the auto button function is changed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, but in the present embodiment, the same operation is not limited to the variable display of the decorative symbol. The setting of the auto button function can be changed also in the demonstration screen display period, the big hit game period, and the like.

  Next, the difference between the case where automatic continuous hitting by a long press operation is performed and the case where automatic continuous hitting by the automatic button function is performed will be described. FIG. 63 is an explanatory view showing a comparative example of an automatic continuous hit by a long press operation and an automatic continuous hit by an automatic button function. In the automatic continuous hit by long press operation during the effective period, the continuous hit determination is turned on after the lapse of a predetermined start standby period after the start of the long press operation of the push button 9031B, but in the start standby period It may be different depending on the type. In the description of FIG. 63, it is assumed that the start standby period of button preview effect A is 4 seconds, and the start standby period of button preview effect A is 2 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 63, it is assumed that the execution of the button preview effect A is determined.

  In the case where automatic continuous hitting by a long press operation is performed after the start of the effective period for button preview effect A, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), start standby after start of long press operation of push button 9031B After the period (4 seconds) has elapsed, the continuous hit determination is turned on (that is, the processing is executed assuming that the continuous hit operation is being performed after 4 seconds of the long press operation, and the scale of the gauge display decreases Go).

  On the other hand, in the case where the automatic consecutive hit by the automatic button function is performed for the button advance effect A, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the consecutive hit determination is turned on immediately after the start of the valid period (that is, Immediately after the start of the effective period, the processing is executed on the assumption that the continuous hitting operation is being performed, and the scale of the gauge display decreases). With such a configuration, when the auto button function is enabled and the long press operation is not performed, and when the auto button function is disabled and the long press operation is performed, the effect (for example, reduction of the scale of the gauge display) Can be made different, which can enhance the rendering effect.

  In addition, with regard to button preview effect B, although an illustration is omitted when automatic continuous hitting by a long press operation is performed after the start of the effective period, the start standby period (2 after the long press operation of push button 9031B is started After passing 2 seconds, the continuous hit judgment is turned on (that is, the processing is executed assuming that the continuous hit operation is being performed after 2 seconds of the long press operation and the scale of the gauge display decreases), and the button advance notice In the case of effect B, in the case where automatic continuous hitting is performed by the automatic button function, continuous hit determination is turned on immediately after the start of the effective period. That is, in either case of button preview effects A and B, effects are produced when the auto button function is enabled and the long press operation is not performed and when the auto button function is disabled and the long press operation is performed, The timing at which (for example, the reduction of the scale of the gauge display) is performed is configured to be different.

  The embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but the apparatus configuration, data configuration, the process shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display apparatus 905, etc. may be changed and modified arbitrarily without departing from the scope of the present invention. Is possible.

  For example, in the above embodiment, although the display start timing ("initial" in FIG. 47) of an image such as a button was after super reach development (see FIG. 51A), the display start timing of an image such as a button is It may be before super reach development or at the time of super reach development. Further, in the above embodiment, the change timing of the image such as the button (“timing 1”, “timing 2”, “timing 3” in FIG. 47) is after the super reach development (see FIG. 51A). The change timing of the image, such as the button, may be before super reach development or at the time of super reach development.

  In addition, the variation pattern of the super reach with pseudo continuous variation ("PA4'-2", "PA4'-3", "PA5'-2", "PA5'-3", "PB4'-2", "PB4 In the variation pattern of all or a part of '-3', 'PB5'-2', 'PB5'-3'), temporary stop indication and re-variable indication may be performed after becoming super reach May be

  In addition, the button development effect may be executed (display of an image such as a button) over a plurality of variable displays (or re-variable displays) in the pseudo continuous change. As an example, when the variation pattern “PB4′-2” progresses from “variable display start → reach → first temporary stop display and re-variable display → super reach β → final stop display” The display and change timings of the image such as the button in the variation pattern “PB4′-2” (“initial”, “timing 1”, “timing 2”, “timing 3” in FIG. 47) are “initial” before reaching, for example Also, reach between the first temporary stop display as "timing 1", after the first temporary stop display until revariable display as "timing 2" and after revariable display as "timing 3" Good. Therefore, when the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is determined in the variation pattern "PB4'-2", variable display start-> display small button (white) ("initial")-> reach-large button ( It changes to white) (the timing 1) → the first temporary stop display → no change (the timing 2) → the revariable display → changes to the large button (red) (the timing 3) → the final stop display. As another example, the variation pattern "PB5'-3" changes from variable display start to reach first display of temporary stop and re-variable display to super reach beta second display of temporary stop and re-variable display final When progressing to stop display, the display and change timing of an image such as a button in the fluctuation pattern “PB5′-3” is, for example, “initial” between reach and the first temporary stop display, After the first temporary stop display to the re-variable display as "timing 1", after developing to super reach β to the second temporary stop display as "timing 2", after the second re-variable display It may be "timing 3". Therefore, when the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is determined in the variation pattern "PB5'-3", the variable display start → reach → small button (white) is displayed ("initial") → first time Temporary stop display → Change to large button (white) (Time 1) → Re-variable display → Advance to super reach β → No change (timing 2) → Second temporary stop display → Re-variable display → Large button (red) It progresses like a change (timing 3)-> final stop display.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when variable display start of a certain variable display is performed, whether or not to execute the button development effect is determined based on the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (FIGS. 46, 48, 49 ( A) See) The presence or absence of the button development effect may be determined at another timing. For example, when there is a start winning, the presence or absence of the button development effect may be determined based on the change category or the like. It should be noted that, at other timings (for example, at the start winning), in addition to the presence or absence of the button development effect, the effect mode of the button development effect (button development effect pattern, etc.) Good.

  When deciding the presence / absence of button development effect, effect mode of button development effect (button development effect pattern etc.) or effect mode of button etc, when there is a start winning, the button before variable display according to the start winning The button development effect may be started during the variable display related to the start winning combination without starting the development effect, or may be started before the variable display related to the start winning combination.

  In addition, when the button development effect is started before the variable display relating to the start winning combination (so-called, when the button development effect is executed by prefetching), the button development effect is immediately started at the start winning combination The button development effect may be started at the start of the variable display corresponding to the winning before the starting winning (the shift of the suspension display), or the variable displaying corresponding to the winning before the starting winning ( The button development effect may be started before the reach or after the reach). In addition, the period from the start of button development effect in the pre-reading period (at the start of display of button display etc.) to the predetermined timing (for example, T13 of FIG. 51) of variable display concerning the start winning is the button display period. is there.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the button etc. action effect (weak action effect, medium action effect, strong action effect) is executed without any foresight (for example, as shown in FIG. 55H, the image JS 901 is Suddenly, the image TS901 is displayed suddenly as shown in FIG. 57H, and the image KS901 is displayed suddenly as shown in FIG. 60B). A notice effect for giving notice of being controlled to the gaming state (eg, an effect falling effect for dropping the movable role object 9017 down to the position of the central portion of the display area of the image display 905, a cut-in effect for cutting in the image, A button or other operation effect may be performed by executing a countdown effect or the like for displaying a number to count down. Specifically, it is sufficient if there is at least a case where a button etc. effect production is executed by execution of the preview production etc and a case where a button etc production effect is executed without the preview production being executed. May or may not be performed in the case where no action presentation such as a button is performed). In addition, the ratio of whether the image such as the button changes in the case where the effect such as the button etc is performed by the execution of the advance effect and the case where the effect such as the button etc is performed without the execution of the advance effect Alternatively, the ratio of changing to an image such as which button may be made different.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the jackpot expectation varies depending on the type of display such as the button (“small button (white)”, “large button (white)”, “big button (red)”, “stick”). (See FIG. 49B) The degree of expectation of becoming a 16R probability variation jackpot may be different depending on the type of display such as a button or the like. Specifically, for example, the determination ratio of the button development effect category may be varied according to the jackpot type (see FIG. 29). Further, when a big hit is usually provided as a big hit type in addition to the big change big hit, depending on the type of display such as a button, the degree of expectation to be the big change big hit may be made different.

(A1) As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to the embodiment of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A And the specific indication corresponding to the detection means (for example, small button (white) D901, large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, stick D904, shown in FIGS. Specific display execution means (for example, button development effect processing (S90529), variable display effect processing (S90172) for performing small button (white) D901U, large button (white) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc. And the like), and the specific display execution means, as the specific display, the first specific display (for example, a small button (white D901 etc.) and an advantage for the player than the first specific display (for example, big hit expectation, 16R probability variation big hit (see FIG. 29) expectation, usually big hit and definite variation big hit will be positive variation big hit When the second identification display (for example, the first identification display is set to the small button (white) D901) having a high degree of expectation), the second identification display is the large button (white) D902, the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, etc. When the first specific display is the large button (white) D902, the second specific display is the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, etc., and the first specific display is the large button (red) D903. (2) The specific display can display a stick D 904 or the like, and after displaying the first specific display, an action effect (for example, the weak effect shown in FIG. 49C) acting on the specific display The second specific display can be displayed by executing the middle action effect and the strong action effect (for example, after the small button (white) D 901 is displayed as shown in FIG. 56 (C), FIG. 56 (D 56E as shown in FIG. 56E by executing the weak-action effect that displays the image JS901 and the image JS902 acting on the small button (white) D901 as shown in FIG. 56E and FIG. 56E. After the large button (white) D902 is displayed as shown in FIG. 56 (E) or the large button (white) D902 is displayed as shown in FIG. 56 (E), the large button (white) D902 is operated as shown in FIG. 57D is executed by displaying the image TS 901, the image TS 902, and the image TS 903 and the stick D 904 can be displayed as shown in FIG.

  According to the above configuration, the rendering effect is improved. For example, when the specific display changes due to the action effect, the effect is easy to understand, and the effect is improved.

(A2) The gaming machine of (A1) performs the operation after displaying the first specific display in an ineffective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 51 to 60). By executing the effect, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, after the large button (white) D 902 is displayed as shown in FIG. 56 (E), FIG. 57 (H) or As shown in FIG. 57 (I), the large effect button (white) shown in FIG. 57 (I) is executed by displaying the image TS901, the image TS902 and the image TS903 acting on the large button (white) D902. White) changing D902 into a stick D904), the second specific display (for example, FIG. 57 (for example, FIG. 57 (for example, T11 to T13 illustrated in FIGS. 51 to 60)). 57 (K), an operation effect using a stick D 904 or a stick D 904 U, etc. (for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (K)), an operation is prompted to result as shown in FIG. 57 (L) And the like) are performed.

  According to the above configuration, the sense of expectation before the effective period can be enhanced.

(A3) In the gaming machine of (A1) or (A2) above, there are a plurality of types of action effects (for example, weak action effects, middle action effects, strong action effects, etc. shown in FIG. 49C), The rate at which the second specific display changes is different depending on which of the operation effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 49C, there is no change and there is a change (weak change, middle) In the case of change or strong change), the determination ratio of the weak action production, the medium action production, and the strong action production is different, so the button changes to the second specific display according to which button etc. Different proportions).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the operation effect.

(A4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (A1) to (A3), the action effect includes a plurality of types (for example, weak action effect, middle action effect, strong action effect, etc. shown in FIG. 49C) The display mode of the specific display after change is a plurality of types (for example, large button (white) D 902, large button (red) D 903, stick D 904, large button (white shown in FIG. 47, FIG. 54 to FIG. ) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc.), and the ratio of changing to the specific display varies depending on which of the effects is executed (for example, FIG. 49 (C In the case of weak change (one step change), medium change (two step change), and strong change (three step change), as shown in), weak action rendition, middle action rendition, strong action rendition Because each decision ratio of is different Depending on which button or other effect is performed, the ratio of weak change, medium change, or strong change differs, for example, when the small button (white) D 901 before the change, the weak change is performed Then, the small button (white) D901 changes to the large button (white) D902, and when the middle change is executed, the small button (white) D901 changes to the large button (red) D903, and a strong change is executed. And the small button (white) D 901 changes to the stick D 904. Therefore, the ratio of changing to which specific display differs depending on which button etc. the effect presentation is executed).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the operation effect.

(A5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A4), the detection means has a plurality of types (for example, push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A, etc.) and corresponds to the specific display after change. The operation effect detected by the detection means is executed (for example, the operation effect detected by the push button 9031 B corresponding to the large button (white) D 902 after change as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 57 and FIG. 60, the stick controller 9031A corresponding to the changed stick D 904 executes the operation effect detected by the push button 31B corresponding to the large button (red) D 903 after the change. Execute detected motion effects).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to focus attention on which specific display means corresponds to which operation means.

(A6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A5), the specific display execution means is a non-effective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 to T11 or the like shown in FIGS. When the specific display is displayed, the specific display is displayed according to an aspect indicating that it is the ineffective period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 60, a small button (superimposed on the control line K90) White) D901, large button (white) D902 on which restriction line K90 is superimposed, large button (red) D903 on which restriction line K90 is superimposed, and stick D904 on which restriction line K90 is superimposed are displayed).

  According to the above configuration, it is easy to understand that it is the ineffective period.

(A7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A6), the specific display execution means displays the specific display over a plurality of variable displays (for example, a plurality of (re) variable displays as pseudo continuous fluctuation) The specific display can be displayed over the display, the specific display can be displayed over a plurality of variable displays by prefetching, etc., and can be changed.

  According to the above configuration, expectation can be enhanced over a plurality of variable displays.

(A8) A notice effect (for example, a cut-in effect) for notifying that the game machine of any of the above (A1) to (A7) is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state etc.) , A countdown effect, a feature falling effect, etc.), and the action effect is executed by executing the advance effect.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for a specific advance notice effect.

  (A9) The gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A8) is in the first state (for example, the state in which the auto button function is set to be disabled) or in the second state (for example, the setting state relating to rendering) Setting means (eg, auto button setting processing shown in FIG. 61) which can be set to a state in which the auto button function is effectively set, etc., and a specific effect (for example, a button advance notice when the effect execution condition is satisfied) In the effects A to C and the decision button effect, it is possible to execute the display to decrease the scale of the gauge display, the display of the advance notice and the display of the yes / no, etc. based on the operation of the push button 9031B being detected. Specific effect executing means (for example, variable display effect process shown in FIG. 44, etc.), the specific effect executing means, in the first state, the detection result of the detecting means It is possible to execute a specific effect based on the fact that the effect execution condition is satisfied, but in the second state, it is possible to execute a specific effect that the effect execution condition is satisfied regardless of the detection result of the detection means ( For example, when the auto button function is set to be effective, even if the push button 9031 B is not operated, display of the advance notice display, display of the pass / fail display, display to decrease the scale of the gauge display, etc.) are performed. The setting means can change the setting from the first state to the second state based on the detection result of the detection means while the variable display is being performed (for example, a part that executes the processing of steps S907103 to S907104 of FIG. 61). Etc).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the interest from being reduced.

(B1) The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A, etc.) And specific indication corresponding to the detection means (for example, small button (white) D901, large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, small button shown in FIG. 47, FIG. 54 to FIG. (White) D901U, large button (white) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc. Specific display execution means (for example, button development effect processing (S90529), variable display effect processing (S90172), etc.) And the specific display execution unit may perform, as the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button (white) D901). ) And an advantage for the player than the first specific display (for example, a big hit expectation, an expectation to be a 16R probability variation big hit (see FIG. 29), an expectation to be a probability variation big hit when there is usually a big hit and a definite variation big hit The second specific display is a large specific button (white) D 902, a large specific button (red) D 903, a stick D 904, etc. (1) When the large display (white) D902 is used as the identification display, the second identification display is the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, etc., and the second identification is displayed as the large button (red) D903. The display can display a stick D904 or the like), and the first specific display can be performed in an ineffective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 to T11 or the like shown in FIGS. 51 to 60). After the display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, as shown in FIG. 54C, after the small button (white) D901 is displayed, the small button (white) D901 is displayed as shown in FIG. G) change to large button (white) D 902, and further change large button (white) D 902 to large button (red) D 903 as shown in FIG. 55 (I)), detection by the detection means During the effective period (for example, T11 to T13 shown in FIGS. 51 to 60) of the second specific display after change (for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (J) or FIG. 55 (K) Red) Operation presentation using D 903 or large button (red) D 903 U, etc. (For example, an instruction to prompt an operation as shown in FIG. 55 (K) to notify the result as shown in FIG. 55 (L)) Is executed.

  According to the above configuration, the rendering effect is improved. For example, since the specific display is changed during the ineffective period, a change can be shown, and the rendering effect is improved.

(B2) In the gaming machine of the above (B1), the first specific display is an effect that acts on the specific display (for example, a weak effect, a middle effect, a strong effect shown in FIG. 49C). Is changed to the second specific display (for example, the small button (white) D 901 shown in FIG. 56C is a small button (as shown in FIG. 56D or 56E). White) The weak action effect of displaying the image JS901 and the image JS902 acting on the D901 is executed to change the large button (white) D902 as shown in FIG. 56 (E), the large shown in FIG. 57 (G) In the button (white) D 902, as shown in FIG. 57H and FIG. 57 (I), a middle action effect of displaying the image TS 901, the image TS 902 and the image TS 903 acting on the large button (white) D 902 is executed. According to FIG. The small button (white) D901 shown in FIG. 60 (A) changes to the stick D904 as shown, and the image KS901 acting on the small button (white) D901 as shown in FIG. 60 (B) and FIG. 60 (C). When a strong action effect of displaying the image KS 902 or the image KS 903 is executed, the display changes to a stick D 904 as shown in FIG. 60C.

  According to the above configuration, the effect is improved by the action effect.

(B3) In the gaming machine of (B1) or (B2) above, the action effect acting on the specific display is a plurality of types (for example, weak action effect, middle action effect, strong action shown in FIG. 49C, etc.) And the like, and the rate at which the second specific display changes is different depending on which of the action effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 49C, there is a change from the case without change) In the case of (weak change, medium change or strong change), since the determination ratio of the weak action production, the medium action production, and the strong action production is different, depending on which button etc. the action production is executed, the second The rate of change to the specific display is different).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the operation effect.

(B4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B3), the action effect acting on the specific display is of a plurality of types (for example, weak action effect shown in FIG. 49C, middle effect effect, The display mode of the specific display after the change is, for example, a large button (white) D 902, a large button (red) D 903, and a stick D 904 shown in FIG. 47 and FIG. There is a large button (white) D 902 U, a large button (red) D 903 U, a stick D 904 U, etc., and the ratio of changing to the specific display varies depending on which of the effects is performed (for example, As shown in FIG. 49C, in the case of weak change (one-step change), medium change (two-step change), and strong change (three-step change), weak-action effects, medium-action Each decision of production, strong action production Because the ratio is different, the ratio of weak change, medium change, strong change is different depending on which button etc. effect presentation is executed.For example, when the small button (white) D901 before change is When the weak change is executed, the small button (white) D901 changes to the large button (white) D902, and when the middle change is performed, the small button (white) D901 changes to the large button (red) D903, which is strong When the change is performed, the small button (white) D 901 changes to the stick D 904. Therefore, the ratio of changing to any specific display differs depending on which button etc. the effect presentation is performed).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the operation effect.

(B5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B4), the detection means has a plurality of types (for example, push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A, etc.) and corresponds to the specific display after change. The operation effect detected by the detection means is executed (for example, the operation effect detected by the push button 9031 B corresponding to the large button (white) D 902 after change as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 57 and FIG. 60, the motion controller detects the operation effect detected by the push button 9031 B corresponding to the large button (red) D 903 after the change, and the stick controller 9031 A corresponding to the stick D 904 after the change. Execute detected motion effects).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to focus attention on which specific display means corresponds to which operation means.

(B6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B5), the specific display execution means is a non-effective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 to T11 or the like shown in FIGS. When the specific display is displayed, the specific display is displayed according to an aspect indicating that it is the ineffective period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 60, a small button (superimposed on the control line K90) White) D901, large button (white) D902 on which restriction line K90 is superimposed, large button (red) D903 on which restriction line K90 is superimposed, and stick D904 on which restriction line K90 is superimposed are displayed).

  According to the above configuration, it is easy to understand that it is the ineffective period.

(B7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B6), the specific display execution means displays the specific display over a plurality of variable displays (for example, a plurality of (re) variable displays as pseudo continuous change) The specific display can be displayed over the display, the specific display can be displayed over a plurality of variable displays by prefetching, etc., and can be changed.

  According to the above configuration, expectation can be enhanced over a plurality of variable displays.

(B8) A notice effect (for example, a cut-in effect) for notifying that the game machine of any of the above (B1) to (B7) is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state etc.) , The countdown effect, the feature fall effect, etc.), and the effect presentation acting on the specific display is performed by the execution of the advance presentation effect, and the second specification is performed by the action presentation being performed. It changes to the display.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for a specific advance notice effect.

  (B9) The gaming machine according to any one of the above (B1) to (B8) is in the first state (for example, the state in which the auto button function is set to be invalid) etc. or in the second state (for example, Setting means (eg, auto button setting processing shown in FIG. 61) which can be set to a state in which the auto button function is effectively set, etc., and a specific effect (for example, a button advance notice when the effect execution condition is satisfied) In the effects A to C and the decision button effect, it is possible to execute the display to decrease the scale of the gauge display, the display of the advance notice and the display of the yes / no, etc. based on the operation of the push button 9031B being detected. Specific effect executing means (for example, variable display effect process shown in FIG. 44, etc.), the specific effect executing means, in the first state, the detection result of the detecting means It is possible to execute a specific effect based on the fact that the effect execution condition is satisfied, but in the second state, it is possible to execute a specific effect that the effect execution condition is satisfied regardless of the detection result of the detection means ( For example, when the auto button function is set to be effective, even if the push button 9031 B is not operated, display of the advance notice display, display of the pass / fail display, display to decrease the scale of the gauge display, etc.) are performed. The setting means can change the setting from the first state to the second state based on the detection result of the detection means while the variable display is being performed (for example, a part that executes the processing of steps S907103 to S907104 of FIG. 61). Etc).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the interest from being reduced.

  In the above (A1) to (A9) and the above (B1) to (B9), the “detection means” is not limited to the push button 9031 B and the stick controller 9031 A, and an object provided in a case ( A sensor that detects an operation (for example, an operation of pushing the whole or a part of the object in the back direction or downward direction, an operation of pulling the object in the front direction or upward direction, an operation of rotating or sliding) May be In addition, it may be a sensor or the like that detects the contact of the player's body (hand or the like) on the glass surface or the like, or a sensor that detects the motion of the player's body (hand or face or the like) not in contact with the gaming machine. Or the like. That is, the "detection means" may be a touch sensor, an infrared sensor, a camera or the like. In the case where the “detection means” is, for example, a touch sensor capable of detecting a touch on the glass surface, the “specific display” is an image that evokes a touch on the glass surface (for example, an image imitating a palm etc. ) May be.

  In addition to the above, arbitrary changes and modifications are possible without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, in the above description, when it is determined to execute the button development effect, the button development effect category is determined before determining the button development effect pattern (see FIG. 48), but the button development effect pattern is directly You may decide. That is, the concept of the button development effect category may not be used.

  The button development effect pattern shown in FIG. 47 is a button development effect pattern in which the “initial” is the “first mode (small button (white))”, but the “initial” is the “second mode (large button) A button development effect pattern may be provided that is (white)), "third mode (large button (red))", or "fourth mode (stick)".

  Further, in the above embodiment, the timing to start displaying an image such as a button is constant (T4), but the timing to start displaying an image such as a button may have a plurality of timings. There may be a plurality of timings for each type of image such as a button.

  Depending on the display start timing, the ratio of whether or not an image such as a button changes (grows up) later may be changed, and the ratio of changing to what extent. For example, when the display start timing is late, the rate of change of an image such as a button or the like may be higher and the rate of change of stick habit may be higher. Further, in an aspect (described later) in which there are a plurality of types of timing when the non-effective period goes to the effective period, the ratio of the timing when the non-effective period goes to the effective period may be different according to the display start timing. For example, when the display start timing is late, the rate at which the timing from the non-effective period to the effective period is later than the predetermined timing may be higher than when it is early. Moreover, when there is an aspect (after-mentioned) which does not turn into an effective period from an ineffective period, you may vary the ratio of whether to become an effective period according to display start timing. For example, when the display start timing is late, the ratio of the effective period may be higher than when it is early. Moreover, in the aspect which performs removal success production (after-mentioned), according to display start timing, the execution ratio of removal success production may be varied. For example, when the display start timing is late, the execution ratio of the removal success effect may be higher than when it is early.

  Also, although the button development effect pattern shown in FIG. 47 changes the image of the button etc. at a maximum of two change timings among the three change timings (timing 1, timing 2 and timing 3), all (three There may be a button or the like that changes the image at the change timing of). That is, a button development effect pattern is provided which changes weakly at timing 1 (first to second), weakly changes at timing 2 (second to third), and weakly changes at timing 3 (third to fourth). It is also good. The change timing may not be three times, but may be once, twice, four times or more.

  Further, a button development effect pattern may be provided to notify the determination of a big hit. As an example, a large sized rainbow button image ("large button (rainbow)") imitating push button 9031 B or a rainbow stick controller image ("stick (rainbow)" imitating stick controller 9031 A " The button development effect pattern (sometimes referred to as the "big hit confirmation button development effect pattern") where "the fifth" is the "fifth mode" and "the fifth mode" is provided, and the variation pattern of the super reach (big hit) ( In "PB4'-X" and "PB5'-X"), there is a case where the button development effect pattern of the big hit decision may be determined, but the variation pattern ("PA4'-X" and "PA5'-X") of the super reach (loss) In “)”, the button development effect pattern of the big hit determination may not be determined.

  In addition, the operating means (push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A, etc.) may emit light at least in part (or the periphery), and may change the operating means according to an image such as a button. For example, when no button or other image is displayed, the light emitting unit of the push button 9031 B and the light emitting unit of the stick controller 9031 A are turned off, and when the small button (white) is displayed, the light emitting unit of the push button 9031 B is white Lights up, and when the large button (white) is displayed, the light emitting portion of the push button 9031 B is blinked in white (or lit in red), and when the large button (red) is displayed, the push button 9031 B The light emitting unit may be lit in red (or blink in red), and the light emitting unit of the stick controller 9031A may be illuminated in white (or blink in white) when the stick is displayed. When the light emitting unit of the operation means is blinked, an image such as a button may be blinked.

  Further, in FIG. 47 etc., an image such as a button corresponds to one of the two operation means (one operation means is made effective). Specifically, the small button (white), the large button (white), and the large button (red) correspond to the push button 9031 B, and the stick corresponds to the stick controller 9031 A. Instead of this, an image such as a button corresponding to both of the two operation means may be displayed. As an example, in any of the small button (white), the large button (white), the large button (red), and the stick, the push button 9031B and the stick controller 9031A may be effective. Since the effect is such that the operation means changes in the middle, by making both effective, it is possible to prevent a situation where the result (such as winning or losing) is not displayed although the operation is performed. Further, as another example, a logo mark corresponding to both the push button 9031 B and the stick controller 9031 A (for example, a logo mark related to a content used for rendering of the pachinko gaming machine 901, a brand name of the pachinko gaming machine 901 Logo mark etc) may be displayed. That is, when the logo mark is displayed during the effective period, the result is displayed even if the push button 9031 B is operated or the stick controller 9031 A is operated.

  Also, according to FIG. 49 (C), when “strong action effect” is executed, “strong change” is expected to be mainly, but “middle change” or “weak change” less than expected In some cases, If the "strong change" or "weak change" occurs due to the execution of the "strong action effect", the "strong change" expected corresponds to a so-called fall, and the player may be discouraged. Therefore, the "strong action effect" may not be determined when the "weak change" or the "middle change" is made. As a result, when the "strong action effect" is executed, the "strong change" is determined, and the player is not discouraged. In addition, when the button image or the like changes after the execution of the “middle effect effect”, it is expected that the “middle change” will mainly be made, but in some cases the “weak change” may be less than expected. Therefore, in the case of "weak change", "middle effect effect" may not be determined. As a result, when the button image or the like changes after the execution of the "middle effect effect", the "middle change" or more is decided, and the player is not discouraged. Although "strong action effect" is not determined when "no change", "middle effect effect" may not be determined in addition to "strong action" when "no change".

  In addition, the change of the image such as the button is divided into the degree of change (the number of steps) ("weak action effect" to change one step, "middle effect effect" to change two steps, "strong action effect" to change three steps Etc.) but they are controlled (managed), but divided into what changes the change of the image such as the button etc. (for example, the second effect, the first aspect or the second aspect of changing from the first aspect to the second aspect) The control may be performed by changing the mode from the mode to the third mode, the first mode or the second mode, or the fourth mode for changing the mode from the third mode to the fourth mode.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the super reach is a so-called battle effect in which an ally character and an enemy character confront each other, but the super reach is not limited to the battle effect. For example, in the case of a big hit, the story may be completed successfully (if the game is lost, the story may not be completed successfully). In addition, when the button development effect is executed in the story system super reach, for example, according to the operation in the effective period (as the operation effect), the result of the story is substituted for the result of the battle effect (e.g. It may be notified that (whether or not the story is completed successfully) is notified.

  An effect (hereinafter referred to as “removal effect” in which an image (for example, the restriction line K90 or the like shown in FIGS. 54 to 60) for notifying that the ineffective period is in progress is removed when the ineffective period starts from the ineffective period. In addition, it may be called "removal success effect" in distinction from "removal failure effect" described later. For example, an effect (e.g., a character (such as a police officer or the like) recovers the control line K90) that the control line K90 superimposed on the large button (white) D902 is removed between FIG. 59C and FIG. 59D. Effect that sucks the restriction line K90 into the vacuum cleaner, an effect that burns out the restriction line K90 with flames, an effect in which the large button (white) D902 itself shakes etc. and the restriction line K90 deviates) may be performed .

  In addition, the removal failure effect (effect in which an image for notifying that the removal success effect is common to at least a part of the effect modes and informing that it is in the non-effective period) may be executed. When the removal failure effect is executed, the super reach may be ended without being the effective period. That is, for example, when the removal success effect is executed in FIG. 59, FIG. 59 (C) → removal success effect → FIG. 59 (D) → FIG. 59 (E) → FIG. 59 (F) → FIG. 59 (C) → removal failure effect → FIG. 59 (F) → FIG. 59 (G). .

  In addition, there are multiple types of timing from the ineffective period to the effective period, and when the ineffective period is late when the ineffective period becomes late, the image such as the button is sufficient because the ineffective period is longer than when it is early. Change (growth). Also, in addition to the case where the removal failure effect is not performed even once, the removal success effect is performed after the removal failure effect is performed one or more times, or the removal failure effect is performed. After being executed one or more times, there may be cases where the removal success effect is not executed. As a result, when the player does not sufficiently grow an image such as a button, the removal success effect is not executed because it is premature as the arrival of the effective period (for example, the effect of trying to remove the restriction line K90 starts If it is done, it is hoped that ultimately the restriction line K90 will not be removed, that is not removal success production but removal failure production is being executed), but if the image such as a button is fully grown That the removal success effect is carried out as an effect of coming (for example, when the effect to remove the control line K90 is started, the control line K90 is eventually removed, that is, not the removal failure effect I hope that the removal success rendition is being performed). That is, it can be made to notice whether the presentation according to the situation is performed.

  In addition, the image for notifying that it is during the ineffective period may be not the image of the restriction line but another image. For example, it may be an image of a chain and a key placed on an image such as a button, or it may be an image of a translucent case for storing an image such as a button, or ice which is shown as an image such as a frozen button. It may be

  Depending on the type of the image for notifying that it is in the ineffective period, the ratio of whether the image such as a button changes (grows up) or the ratio of changing to a later time may be made different. For example, in the case of “chain and key”, the rate of change in the image of the button or the like may be higher later than in the case of “control line”, and the rate of change of the stick may be higher. Also, in an aspect in which there are multiple types of timing when the ineffective period comes to the effective period, if the ratio of the timing from the ineffective period to the effective period differs according to the type of the image for notifying that it is in the ineffective period. You may For example, in the case of “chain and key”, the rate at which the timing from the non-effective period to the effective period is later than the predetermined timing may be higher than in the case of the “regulatory line”. Further, in a case where the ineffective period does not become the effective period, the ratio of whether or not the effective period may be changed may be made according to an image for notifying that the ineffective period is in progress. For example, in the case of "chain and key", the ratio of the effective period may be higher than in the case of "regulatory line". Further, in the aspect of executing the removal success effect, the execution ratio of the removal success effect may be varied according to the image for notifying that the ineffective period is in progress. For example, in the case of “chain and key”, the execution ratio of the removal success effect may be set higher than in the case of “control line”.

  In addition, an image for notifying that it is in the ineffective period may be changed (grown). For example, the small button (white) is set as a "control line", and the large button (white) is changed to "chain and key", and the large button (red) is used as a "translucent case". The image may be changed to notify that it is in the ineffective period at the same timing as the change timing of the button image, such as changing it to “ice” when it becomes a stick. . For example, when it is a large button (white), it changes from "control line" to "chain and key", and when it is a stick, it changes from "chain and key" to "semi-transparent case" and further "ice" The image for notifying that it is in the non-effective period may be changed at a timing different from the change timing of the image of the button or the like.

  In the aspect of changing the image for informing that it is in the ineffective period, the image for informing that it is in the ineffective period may be changed by the operation effect. The action effect of changing the image for informing that it is in the non-effective period may be the same (common) as the action effect of changing the image such as a button. In addition, when common effects and effects are executed, an image for notifying that an image such as a button or the like is in the ineffective period is also changed, and an information indicating that the image such as the button is also in the ineffective period is notified There may be a time when neither the image for change nor the change in one of the images changes. In addition, the action effect of changing the image for notifying that it is in the ineffective period and the action effect of changing the image such as a button may be different. That is, apart from the effect presentation that changes the image such as the button, a special effect presentation that changes the image for notifying that it is in the ineffective period may be provided.

  In addition, there are cases where an image for notifying that it is in the ineffective period changes (grows) by an effect of the same type, and an image for notifying that it is in the ineffective period is removed. It may be. In other words, by performing the action effect of changing the image for notifying that it is in the ineffective period, it is notified that it is in the ineffective period as in the case where the removal effect described above is performed. In some cases, the image to be removed may be removed. That is, when a certain effect (effect having both action effect and removal effect property) is executed, there is a time when an image such as a button changes and a time when it does not change, and it is informed that it is during the ineffective period. There may be times when the image for change may be changed and when it may be removed. In addition, it may be removed after the change (for example, the "ice" after the change is removed after the change from the "semi-transparent case" to the "ice", etc.). Although the image for notifying that it is in the non-effective period has been described in two ways, whether it is removed or not removed, there are stages in the removal, and the images may be gradually removed. That is, when a certain effect (a effect having both the effect and the effect of the removal effect) or the removal effect is executed, the "ice" is slightly broken, and again, a certain effect (the effect having both the effect and the removal effect) or the removal The "ice" may be completely cracked and removed when the rendition is performed. If the image for notifying that the ineffective period is in progress is in the process of removal, it may not be changed, or may be changed and return to the original state after the change. The state during the change may be maintained after the change. For example, if the "translucent case" is slightly broken, it may not be changed to "ice", or it may be changed to unbroken "ice", or it may be slightly broken. It may change.

  Further, in the above embodiment, although the reserve data (first reserve information) of the first special figure game and the reserve data (second reserve information) of the second special figure game are not distinguished, they are digested in the order of winning ( The second reserve information may be prioritized and digested (see FIG. 40).

  Moreover, in the above embodiment, the “ratio” is not limited to one having a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B: C = 70%: 20%: 10%. 49 (B) and FIG. 50 (A), but there is a relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% or A: B: C = 70%: 30%: 0% (ie, , 100% and 0% allocations are also included).

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the number of rounds is 2 types of 8 rounds and 16 rounds, three or more types of rounds may be sufficient. For example, there may be three types: 4R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, and 16R probability variation big hit. Further, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine in which only the probability variation big hit is provided as the big hit category is shown, but as described above, the game may include a non-deterministic variation big hit (usually a big hit) as the big hit category.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment showed the aspect which carries out the variable display of multiple types of special symbols, such as a number which shows "0"-"8", and a symbol which shows "-", and a display result is derived and displayed, the said variable display Is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the special symbol to be displayed variably may be different from the special symbol to be derived and displayed as the variable display result. In other words, special symbols that are not included in the changing multiple types of special symbols may be derived and displayed as the variable display result, and among the changing multiple types of special symbols, those that are not specially derived displayed as the variable display result May be included. Moreover, it is not necessary to variably display a plurality of types of special symbols, and the aspect may be such that variable display is performed using only one type of special symbol. As a variable display using one type of special symbol, for example, the one type of special symbol may be blinked (may be alternately turned on / off). That is, repetition of lighting and extinguishing may be variable display. And even in this case, the one kind of special symbol may be derived and displayed (lit) at the end, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end It may be In addition, the same applies to variable display of other symbols (for example, a normal symbol, a decorative symbol, etc.).

  In the above embodiment, the big hit game state is controlled based on the big hit symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, but the big hit game state is controlled. The aspect to perform is not limited to this. For example, a specific area is provided in the vicinity of the second starting winning opening or inside the second starting winning opening, and is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the game ball entering (passing) in the specific area You may be there.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board 9012 of a change pattern indicating a change mode such as the change time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of pseudo-link, one change pattern specification command In the example of transmitting the change pattern, the effect control board 9012 may be notified of the change pattern by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the microcomputer 90100 for game control is before reaching reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo sequence, presence or absence of slip effect in the first command (in the case where it does not reach, so-called Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop, and the second command after reaching reach such as reach type and re-lottery effect (if it does not reach, so-called (2) after the stop may be transmitted a command indicating a fluctuation time or a fluctuation mode. In this case, on the effect control board 9012 side, effect control in variable display may be performed based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. In the game control microcomputer 90100, the variation time is notified by each of two commands, and a specific variation mode to be executed at each timing is selected by the effect control board 9012. It is also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending a first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. In addition, the fluctuation | variation aspect shown by each command is not necessarily limited to this example, It can change suitably also about the order to transmit. As described above, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which has to be stored as the fluctuation pattern designation command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the main substrate 9011 stores the determination table for random number values (display result determination table, big hit type determination table, and variation category determination table), and is extracted from the main substrate 9011 at the start winning prize. Based on the random number values (MR1 'to MR3'), the main substrate 9011 refers to the random number value determination table and determines random number value determination processing (determination of whether or not to be a big hit, and determination of variation category, and big hit) In some cases, the determination of the type of the big hit is executed, and the effect control board 9012 receives an example of the determination result determined in the main board 9011 and shows an example of executing pre-reading notice effect based on the received determination result. However, the mode of execution of the prefetch advance notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the random number value determination table is stored in the effect control substrate 9012 and the random number itself is transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 (for example, an effect control command capable of specifying random number values from the main substrate 9011) Is transmitted to the effect control board 9012), the effect control board 9012 receives the random number value itself extracted in the main board 9011, and based on the received random number value, refers to the random number value determination table and refers to the random number value. The pre-reading notice effect may be performed based on the determination result of the determination process. That is, the determination process of the random number value may be performed in the effect control board 9012. Further, the determination process of the random number value may be performed on both the main substrate 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012. For example, the effect control board 9012 may receive a part of random number values and execute the process of determining the random number value, and may receive the determination result determined in the main board 9011. Specifically, for example, the effect control board 9012 receives the random number values (MR1 'and MR2') and performs determination of whether or not to be a big hit and determination of the type of big hit if it is a big hit, The determination result of the variation category determined by the main substrate 9011 based on the random value (MR3 ') may be received. That is, the effect control board 9012 can execute the advance notice / notification effect based on the judgment result judged by itself and the judgment result judged by the main board 9011.

  The random numbers may not be synchronized by changing the update timing of each random number or changing the update range of each random number.

  In addition, for example, a gaming machine that gives a gaming score for use in a game by using a frequency that is a gaming value of a size specified by recording information of a gaming recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention can be applied. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine into the game area.

  In the above description, it has been described that the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables and the like prepared for the CPU 90103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. It does not necessarily have to be stored in a table format (including, for example, a structure, an array, etc.). That is, although the determination value (decision value) to be compared with the extracted random value may be stored together in the ROM 90101, it may be dispersed (dotted) in a plurality of locations in the ROM 90101 and stored. Alternatively, the ROM 90101 may store an equation or program for outputting the result (for example, a big hit or a loss in the example of FIG. 28) when the extracted random number value is input. The same applies to the determination table and the like stored in the ROM 90121.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted to set a predetermined bet number, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the control lever by the player. A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when the combination of stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player The present invention is also applicable to slot machines equipped with at least one of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus etc.). For example, a slot machine to which the present invention is applied performs detection means (rendering button) capable of detecting the action of the player, and a specific display (rendering button image imitating a reproduction button) corresponding to the detecting means. And a specific display execution unit, wherein the specific display execution unit has a first specific display (a button image for presentation (white)) and an advantage for the player over the first specific display as the specific display. The second specific display (a button image for effect (red)) can be displayed (for example, a high expectation of becoming a bonus, etc.), and after displaying the first specific display, an action effect that acts on the specific display It may be a slot machine capable of displaying the second specific display by executing.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed / provided by a removable recording medium to the computer device etc. included in the pachinko gaming machine 901, but the computer device etc. It may be distributed by pre-installing it in the storage device of. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  And the execution form of the game is not limited to that executed by attaching the removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line etc. in the internal memory etc. It may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

1 Pachinko Machine 9 Effect Display Device 100 Microcomputer 560 for Effect Control Microcomputer 901 for Game Control Pachinko Machine 902 Pachinko Machine 902 Game Board 903 Frame for Game Machine 904A 1st Special Symbol Display Device 904B 2nd Special Symbol Display Device 905 Image Display Device 905H start winning memory display area 906A normal winning ball device 906B normal variable winning ball device 907 special variable winning ball device 908 speaker 909 lamp 9011 main board 9012 effect control board 9013 voice control board 9014 lamp control board 9015 relay board 9016 character control board 9017 Movable role 9020 Normal symbol display 9021 Gate switch 9022A 1st starting opening switch 9022B 2nd starting opening switch 9023 Count switch 9031A Stick controller 9031B Sshubotan 90100 game control microcomputer 90101,90121 ROM
90102, 90122 RAM
90103 CPU
90104, 90124 random number circuit 90105, 90125 I / O
90120 CPU for effect control
90123 Display control unit 90126 RTC circuit

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display of identification information and controlling it to an advantageous state for the player,
A variable display means capable of performing variable display of identification information;
The identification information includes first information and second information,
The display pattern of the identification information is provided with a first display pattern for displaying the first information without displaying the second information, and a second display pattern for displaying the first information and the second information.
The fluctuation display means executes the fluctuation display with the first display pattern after the identification information starts the fluctuation in the predetermined direction, and stops the fluctuation display with the second display pattern.
The display mode differs between the first information when displayed in the first display pattern and the first information when displayed in the second display pattern,
further,
Detection means capable of detecting the action of the player;
Specific display execution means for performing specific display corresponding to the detection means;
Equipped with
The specific display execution means is
As the specific display, it is possible to display a first specific display and a second specific display which is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display.
After the first specific display is displayed in the ineffective period of detection by the detection means, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display,
A game machine characterized in that an operation effect using the second specific display after change is executed in an effective period of detection by the detection means.